1 /* Convert tree expression to rtl instructions, for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1988-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 This file is part of GCC.
6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
22 #include "coretypes.h"
27 #include "stringpool.h"
28 #include "stor-layout.h"
33 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
36 #include "insn-config.h"
37 #include "insn-attr.h"
38 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
44 #include "typeclass.h"
46 #include "langhooks.h"
49 #include "tree-iterator.h"
50 #include "basic-block.h"
51 #include "tree-ssa-alias.h"
52 #include "internal-fn.h"
53 #include "gimple-expr.h"
56 #include "gimple-ssa.h"
58 #include "tree-ssanames.h"
60 #include "common/common-target.h"
63 #include "diagnostic.h"
64 #include "tree-ssa-live.h"
65 #include "tree-outof-ssa.h"
66 #include "target-globals.h"
68 #include "tree-ssa-address.h"
69 #include "cfgexpand.h"
71 /* Decide whether a function's arguments should be processed
72 from first to last or from last to first.
74 They should if the stack and args grow in opposite directions, but
75 only if we have push insns. */
79 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
80 #if defined (STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD) != defined (ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD)
81 #define PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED /* If it's last to first. */
87 #ifndef STACK_PUSH_CODE
88 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
89 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_DEC
91 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_INC
96 /* If this is nonzero, we do not bother generating VOLATILE
97 around volatile memory references, and we are willing to
98 output indirect addresses. If cse is to follow, we reject
99 indirect addresses so a useful potential cse is generated;
100 if it is used only once, instruction combination will produce
101 the same indirect address eventually. */
102 int cse_not_expected
;
104 /* This structure is used by move_by_pieces to describe the move to
106 struct move_by_pieces_d
115 int explicit_inc_from
;
116 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
;
117 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
121 /* This structure is used by store_by_pieces to describe the clear to
124 struct store_by_pieces_d
130 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
;
131 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
132 rtx (*constfun
) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
);
137 static void move_by_pieces_1 (insn_gen_fn
, machine_mode
,
138 struct move_by_pieces_d
*);
139 static bool block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void);
140 static bool emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, unsigned, unsigned, HOST_WIDE_INT
,
141 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
142 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
);
143 static tree
emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int);
144 static void emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, unsigned);
145 static rtx
clear_by_pieces_1 (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
);
146 static void clear_by_pieces (rtx
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, unsigned int);
147 static void store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces_d
*, unsigned int);
148 static void store_by_pieces_2 (insn_gen_fn
, machine_mode
,
149 struct store_by_pieces_d
*);
150 static tree
clear_storage_libcall_fn (int);
151 static rtx
compress_float_constant (rtx
, rtx
);
152 static rtx
get_subtarget (rtx
);
153 static void store_constructor_field (rtx
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
154 HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
,
155 tree
, int, alias_set_type
);
156 static void store_constructor (tree
, rtx
, int, HOST_WIDE_INT
);
157 static rtx
store_field (rtx
, HOST_WIDE_INT
, HOST_WIDE_INT
,
158 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
,
159 enum machine_mode
, tree
, alias_set_type
, bool);
161 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
highest_pow2_factor_for_target (const_tree
, const_tree
);
163 static int is_aligning_offset (const_tree
, const_tree
);
164 static void expand_operands (tree
, tree
, rtx
, rtx
*, rtx
*,
165 enum expand_modifier
);
166 static rtx
reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx
, rtx
, tree
);
167 static rtx
do_store_flag (sepops
, rtx
, enum machine_mode
);
169 static void emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode
, rtx
, tree
);
171 static void do_tablejump (rtx
, enum machine_mode
, rtx
, rtx
, rtx
, int);
172 static rtx
const_vector_from_tree (tree
);
173 static void write_complex_part (rtx
, rtx
, bool);
175 /* This macro is used to determine whether move_by_pieces should be called
176 to perform a structure copy. */
177 #ifndef MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
178 #define MOVE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
179 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, MOVE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
180 < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
183 /* This macro is used to determine whether clear_by_pieces should be
184 called to clear storage. */
185 #ifndef CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P
186 #define CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
187 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
188 < (unsigned int) CLEAR_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
191 /* This macro is used to determine whether store_by_pieces should be
192 called to "memset" storage with byte values other than zero. */
193 #ifndef SET_BY_PIECES_P
194 #define SET_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
195 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
196 < (unsigned int) SET_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
199 /* This macro is used to determine whether store_by_pieces should be
200 called to "memcpy" storage when the source is a constant string. */
201 #ifndef STORE_BY_PIECES_P
202 #define STORE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
203 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
204 < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO (optimize_insn_for_speed_p ()))
207 /* This is run to set up which modes can be used
208 directly in memory and to initialize the block move optab. It is run
209 at the beginning of compilation and when the target is reinitialized. */
212 init_expr_target (void)
215 enum machine_mode mode
;
220 /* Try indexing by frame ptr and try by stack ptr.
221 It is known that on the Convex the stack ptr isn't a valid index.
222 With luck, one or the other is valid on any machine. */
223 mem
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
224 mem1
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, frame_pointer_rtx
);
226 /* A scratch register we can modify in-place below to avoid
227 useless RTL allocations. */
228 reg
= gen_rtx_REG (VOIDmode
, -1);
230 insn
= rtx_alloc (INSN
);
231 pat
= gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
232 PATTERN (insn
) = pat
;
234 for (mode
= VOIDmode
; (int) mode
< NUM_MACHINE_MODES
;
235 mode
= (enum machine_mode
) ((int) mode
+ 1))
239 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 0;
240 PUT_MODE (mem
, mode
);
241 PUT_MODE (mem1
, mode
);
242 PUT_MODE (reg
, mode
);
244 /* See if there is some register that can be used in this mode and
245 directly loaded or stored from memory. */
247 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
)
248 for (regno
= 0; regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
249 && (direct_load
[(int) mode
] == 0 || direct_store
[(int) mode
] == 0);
252 if (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno
, mode
))
255 SET_REGNO (reg
, regno
);
258 SET_DEST (pat
) = reg
;
259 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
260 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = 1;
262 SET_SRC (pat
) = mem1
;
263 SET_DEST (pat
) = reg
;
264 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
265 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = 1;
268 SET_DEST (pat
) = mem
;
269 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
270 direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 1;
273 SET_DEST (pat
) = mem1
;
274 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
275 direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 1;
279 mem
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, gen_rtx_raw_REG (Pmode
, 10000));
281 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
282 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
284 enum machine_mode srcmode
;
285 for (srcmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT
); srcmode
!= mode
;
286 srcmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode
))
290 ic
= can_extend_p (mode
, srcmode
, 0);
291 if (ic
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
294 PUT_MODE (mem
, srcmode
);
296 if (insn_operand_matches (ic
, 1, mem
))
297 float_extend_from_mem
[mode
][srcmode
] = true;
302 /* This is run at the start of compiling a function. */
307 memset (&crtl
->expr
, 0, sizeof (crtl
->expr
));
310 /* Copy data from FROM to TO, where the machine modes are not the same.
311 Both modes may be integer, or both may be floating, or both may be
313 UNSIGNEDP should be nonzero if FROM is an unsigned type.
314 This causes zero-extension instead of sign-extension. */
317 convert_move (rtx to
, rtx from
, int unsignedp
)
319 enum machine_mode to_mode
= GET_MODE (to
);
320 enum machine_mode from_mode
= GET_MODE (from
);
321 int to_real
= SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode
);
322 int from_real
= SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode
);
326 /* rtx code for making an equivalent value. */
327 enum rtx_code equiv_code
= (unsignedp
< 0 ? UNKNOWN
328 : (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
));
331 gcc_assert (to_real
== from_real
);
332 gcc_assert (to_mode
!= BLKmode
);
333 gcc_assert (from_mode
!= BLKmode
);
335 /* If the source and destination are already the same, then there's
340 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
341 the required extension, strip it. We don't handle such SUBREGs as
344 if (GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (from
)
345 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (from
)))
346 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
347 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (from
) == unsignedp
)
348 from
= gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
), from_mode
= to_mode
;
350 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (to
) != SUBREG
|| !SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (to
));
352 if (to_mode
== from_mode
353 || (from_mode
== VOIDmode
&& CONSTANT_P (from
)))
355 emit_move_insn (to
, from
);
359 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode
) || VECTOR_MODE_P (from_mode
))
361 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
));
363 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode
))
364 from
= simplify_gen_subreg (to_mode
, from
, GET_MODE (from
), 0);
366 to
= simplify_gen_subreg (from_mode
, to
, GET_MODE (to
), 0);
368 emit_move_insn (to
, from
);
372 if (GET_CODE (to
) == CONCAT
&& GET_CODE (from
) == CONCAT
)
374 convert_move (XEXP (to
, 0), XEXP (from
, 0), unsignedp
);
375 convert_move (XEXP (to
, 1), XEXP (from
, 1), unsignedp
);
384 gcc_assert ((GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
)
385 != GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
386 || (DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode
)
387 != DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode
)));
389 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
390 /* Conversion between decimal float and binary float, same size. */
391 tab
= DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode
) ? trunc_optab
: sext_optab
;
392 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
))
397 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
399 code
= convert_optab_handler (tab
, to_mode
, from_mode
);
400 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
402 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
,
403 tab
== sext_optab
? FLOAT_EXTEND
: FLOAT_TRUNCATE
);
407 /* Otherwise use a libcall. */
408 libcall
= convert_optab_libfunc (tab
, to_mode
, from_mode
);
410 /* Is this conversion implemented yet? */
411 gcc_assert (libcall
);
414 value
= emit_library_call_value (libcall
, NULL_RTX
, LCT_CONST
, to_mode
,
416 insns
= get_insns ();
418 emit_libcall_block (insns
, to
, value
,
419 tab
== trunc_optab
? gen_rtx_FLOAT_TRUNCATE (to_mode
,
421 : gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (to_mode
, from
));
425 /* Handle pointer conversion. */ /* SPEE 900220. */
426 /* Targets are expected to provide conversion insns between PxImode and
427 xImode for all MODE_PARTIAL_INT modes they use, but no others. */
428 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode
) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
)
430 enum machine_mode full_mode
431 = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
), MODE_INT
);
433 gcc_assert (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
, full_mode
)
434 != CODE_FOR_nothing
);
436 if (full_mode
!= from_mode
)
437 from
= convert_to_mode (full_mode
, from
, unsignedp
);
438 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
, full_mode
),
442 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode
) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
)
445 enum machine_mode full_mode
446 = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
), MODE_INT
);
447 convert_optab ctab
= unsignedp
? zext_optab
: sext_optab
;
448 enum insn_code icode
;
450 icode
= convert_optab_handler (ctab
, full_mode
, from_mode
);
451 gcc_assert (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
);
453 if (to_mode
== full_mode
)
455 emit_unop_insn (icode
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
459 new_from
= gen_reg_rtx (full_mode
);
460 emit_unop_insn (icode
, new_from
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
462 /* else proceed to integer conversions below. */
463 from_mode
= full_mode
;
467 /* Make sure both are fixed-point modes or both are not. */
468 gcc_assert (ALL_SCALAR_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (from_mode
) ==
469 ALL_SCALAR_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (to_mode
));
470 if (ALL_SCALAR_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (from_mode
))
472 /* If we widen from_mode to to_mode and they are in the same class,
473 we won't saturate the result.
474 Otherwise, always saturate the result to play safe. */
475 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode
) == GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode
)
476 && GET_MODE_SIZE (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
))
477 expand_fixed_convert (to
, from
, 0, 0);
479 expand_fixed_convert (to
, from
, 0, 1);
483 /* Now both modes are integers. */
485 /* Handle expanding beyond a word. */
486 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
)
487 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) > BITS_PER_WORD
)
494 enum machine_mode lowpart_mode
;
495 int nwords
= CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
), UNITS_PER_WORD
);
497 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
498 if ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, from_mode
, unsignedp
))
501 /* If FROM is a SUBREG, put it into a register. Do this
502 so that we always generate the same set of insns for
503 better cse'ing; if an intermediate assignment occurred,
504 we won't be doing the operation directly on the SUBREG. */
505 if (optimize
> 0 && GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
)
506 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
507 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
, equiv_code
);
510 /* Next, try converting via full word. */
511 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
512 && ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, word_mode
, unsignedp
))
513 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
515 rtx word_to
= gen_reg_rtx (word_mode
);
518 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to
, from
))
519 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
522 convert_move (word_to
, from
, unsignedp
);
523 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, word_to
, equiv_code
);
527 /* No special multiword conversion insn; do it by hand. */
530 /* Since we will turn this into a no conflict block, we must ensure the
531 the source does not overlap the target so force it into an isolated
532 register when maybe so. Likewise for any MEM input, since the
533 conversion sequence might require several references to it and we
534 must ensure we're getting the same value every time. */
536 if (MEM_P (from
) || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to
, from
))
537 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
539 /* Get a copy of FROM widened to a word, if necessary. */
540 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
541 lowpart_mode
= word_mode
;
543 lowpart_mode
= from_mode
;
545 lowfrom
= convert_to_mode (lowpart_mode
, from
, unsignedp
);
547 lowpart
= gen_lowpart (lowpart_mode
, to
);
548 emit_move_insn (lowpart
, lowfrom
);
550 /* Compute the value to put in each remaining word. */
552 fill_value
= const0_rtx
;
554 fill_value
= emit_store_flag (gen_reg_rtx (word_mode
),
555 LT
, lowfrom
, const0_rtx
,
558 /* Fill the remaining words. */
559 for (i
= GET_MODE_SIZE (lowpart_mode
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
; i
< nwords
; i
++)
561 int index
= (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
? nwords
- i
- 1 : i
);
562 rtx subword
= operand_subword (to
, index
, 1, to_mode
);
564 gcc_assert (subword
);
566 if (fill_value
!= subword
)
567 emit_move_insn (subword
, fill_value
);
570 insns
= get_insns ();
577 /* Truncating multi-word to a word or less. */
578 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
) > BITS_PER_WORD
579 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) <= BITS_PER_WORD
)
582 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from
)
583 && direct_load
[(int) to_mode
]
584 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from
, 0),
585 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (from
)))
587 || GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
))
588 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
589 convert_move (to
, gen_lowpart (word_mode
, from
), 0);
593 /* Now follow all the conversions between integers
594 no more than a word long. */
596 /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode. */
597 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
)
598 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (to_mode
, from_mode
))
601 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from
)
602 && direct_load
[(int) to_mode
]
603 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from
, 0),
604 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (from
)))
606 || GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
))
607 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
608 if (REG_P (from
) && REGNO (from
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
609 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (from
), to_mode
))
610 from
= copy_to_reg (from
);
611 emit_move_insn (to
, gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
));
615 /* Handle extension. */
616 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
))
618 /* Convert directly if that works. */
619 if ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, from_mode
, unsignedp
))
622 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
, equiv_code
);
627 enum machine_mode intermediate
;
631 /* Search for a mode to convert via. */
632 for (intermediate
= from_mode
; intermediate
!= VOIDmode
;
633 intermediate
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (intermediate
))
634 if (((can_extend_p (to_mode
, intermediate
, unsignedp
)
636 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (intermediate
)
637 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (to_mode
, intermediate
)))
638 && (can_extend_p (intermediate
, from_mode
, unsignedp
)
639 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
641 convert_move (to
, convert_to_mode (intermediate
, from
,
642 unsignedp
), unsignedp
);
646 /* No suitable intermediate mode.
647 Generate what we need with shifts. */
648 shift_amount
= (GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
)
649 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
));
650 from
= gen_lowpart (to_mode
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
));
651 tmp
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, to_mode
, from
, shift_amount
,
653 tmp
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, to_mode
, tmp
, shift_amount
,
656 emit_move_insn (to
, tmp
);
661 /* Support special truncate insns for certain modes. */
662 if (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
,
663 from_mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
665 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab
, to_mode
, from_mode
),
670 /* Handle truncation of volatile memrefs, and so on;
671 the things that couldn't be truncated directly,
672 and for which there was no special instruction.
674 ??? Code above formerly short-circuited this, for most integer
675 mode pairs, with a force_reg in from_mode followed by a recursive
676 call to this routine. Appears always to have been wrong. */
677 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode
))
679 rtx temp
= force_reg (to_mode
, gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
));
680 emit_move_insn (to
, temp
);
684 /* Mode combination is not recognized. */
688 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
689 from converting X to mode MODE.
690 Both X and MODE may be floating, or both integer.
691 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
692 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
693 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion. */
696 convert_to_mode (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, int unsignedp
)
698 return convert_modes (mode
, VOIDmode
, x
, unsignedp
);
701 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
702 from converting X from mode OLDMODE to mode MODE.
703 Both modes may be floating, or both integer.
704 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
706 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
707 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.
709 You can give VOIDmode for OLDMODE, if you are sure X has a nonvoid mode. */
712 convert_modes (enum machine_mode mode
, enum machine_mode oldmode
, rtx x
, int unsignedp
)
716 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
717 the required extension, strip it. */
719 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x
)
720 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
))) >= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)
721 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x
) == unsignedp
)
722 x
= gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
724 if (GET_MODE (x
) != VOIDmode
)
725 oldmode
= GET_MODE (x
);
730 /* There is one case that we must handle specially: If we are converting
731 a CONST_INT into a mode whose size is twice HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and
732 we are to interpret the constant as unsigned, gen_lowpart will do
733 the wrong if the constant appears negative. What we want to do is
734 make the high-order word of the constant zero, not all ones. */
736 if (unsignedp
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
737 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) == HOST_BITS_PER_DOUBLE_INT
738 && CONST_INT_P (x
) && INTVAL (x
) < 0)
740 double_int val
= double_int::from_uhwi (INTVAL (x
));
742 /* We need to zero extend VAL. */
743 if (oldmode
!= VOIDmode
)
744 val
= val
.zext (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode
));
746 return immed_double_int_const (val
, mode
);
749 /* We can do this with a gen_lowpart if both desired and current modes
750 are integer, and this is either a constant integer, a register, or a
751 non-volatile MEM. Except for the constant case where MODE is no
752 wider than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, we must be narrowing the operand. */
755 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
756 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
757 && GET_MODE_CLASS (oldmode
) == MODE_INT
758 && (CONST_DOUBLE_AS_INT_P (x
)
759 || (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (oldmode
)
760 && ((MEM_P (x
) && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (x
)
761 && direct_load
[(int) mode
])
763 && (! HARD_REGISTER_P (x
)
764 || HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (x
), mode
))
765 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode
,
768 /* ?? If we don't know OLDMODE, we have to assume here that
769 X does not need sign- or zero-extension. This may not be
770 the case, but it's the best we can do. */
771 if (CONST_INT_P (x
) && oldmode
!= VOIDmode
772 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (oldmode
))
774 HOST_WIDE_INT val
= INTVAL (x
);
776 /* We must sign or zero-extend in this case. Start by
777 zero-extending, then sign extend if we need to. */
778 val
&= GET_MODE_MASK (oldmode
);
780 && val_signbit_known_set_p (oldmode
, val
))
781 val
|= ~GET_MODE_MASK (oldmode
);
783 return gen_int_mode (val
, mode
);
786 return gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
789 /* Converting from integer constant into mode is always equivalent to an
791 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode
) && GET_MODE (x
) == VOIDmode
)
793 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode
));
794 return simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, x
, oldmode
, 0);
797 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
798 convert_move (temp
, x
, unsignedp
);
802 /* Return the largest alignment we can use for doing a move (or store)
803 of MAX_PIECES. ALIGN is the largest alignment we could use. */
806 alignment_for_piecewise_move (unsigned int max_pieces
, unsigned int align
)
808 enum machine_mode tmode
;
810 tmode
= mode_for_size (max_pieces
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, MODE_INT
, 1);
811 if (align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode
))
812 align
= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode
);
815 enum machine_mode tmode
, xmode
;
817 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
), xmode
= tmode
;
819 xmode
= tmode
, tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
820 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) > max_pieces
821 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode
, align
))
824 align
= MAX (align
, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode
));
830 /* Return the widest integer mode no wider than SIZE. If no such mode
831 can be found, return VOIDmode. */
833 static enum machine_mode
834 widest_int_mode_for_size (unsigned int size
)
836 enum machine_mode tmode
, mode
= VOIDmode
;
838 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
839 tmode
!= VOIDmode
; tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
840 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) < size
)
846 /* STORE_MAX_PIECES is the number of bytes at a time that we can
847 store efficiently. Due to internal GCC limitations, this is
848 MOVE_MAX_PIECES limited by the number of bytes GCC can represent
849 for an immediate constant. */
851 #define STORE_MAX_PIECES MIN (MOVE_MAX_PIECES, 2 * sizeof (HOST_WIDE_INT))
853 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes can be moved by using several move
854 instructions. Return nonzero if a call to move_by_pieces should
858 can_move_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
859 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
861 return MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
);
864 /* Generate several move instructions to copy LEN bytes from block FROM to
865 block TO. (These are MEM rtx's with BLKmode).
867 If PUSH_ROUNDING is defined and TO is NULL, emit_single_push_insn is
868 used to push FROM to the stack.
870 ALIGN is maximum stack alignment we can assume.
872 If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala
873 mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala
877 move_by_pieces (rtx to
, rtx from
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
,
878 unsigned int align
, int endp
)
880 struct move_by_pieces_d data
;
881 enum machine_mode to_addr_mode
;
882 enum machine_mode from_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (from
);
883 rtx to_addr
, from_addr
= XEXP (from
, 0);
884 unsigned int max_size
= MOVE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
885 enum insn_code icode
;
887 align
= MIN (to
? MEM_ALIGN (to
) : align
, MEM_ALIGN (from
));
890 data
.from_addr
= from_addr
;
893 to_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (to
);
894 to_addr
= XEXP (to
, 0);
897 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
898 || GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
900 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
904 to_addr_mode
= VOIDmode
;
908 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
914 data
.to_addr
= to_addr
;
917 = (GET_CODE (from_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (from_addr
) == PRE_DEC
918 || GET_CODE (from_addr
) == POST_INC
919 || GET_CODE (from_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
921 data
.explicit_inc_from
= 0;
922 data
.explicit_inc_to
= 0;
923 if (data
.reverse
) data
.offset
= len
;
926 /* If copying requires more than two move insns,
927 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
928 and use post-increment if available. */
929 if (!(data
.autinc_from
&& data
.autinc_to
)
930 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len
, align
, max_size
) > 2)
932 /* Find the mode of the largest move...
933 MODE might not be used depending on the definitions of the
934 USE_* macros below. */
935 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
936 = widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
938 if (USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_from
)
940 data
.from_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (from_addr_mode
,
941 plus_constant (from_addr_mode
,
943 data
.autinc_from
= 1;
944 data
.explicit_inc_from
= -1;
946 if (USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
.autinc_from
)
948 data
.from_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (from_addr_mode
, from_addr
);
949 data
.autinc_from
= 1;
950 data
.explicit_inc_from
= 1;
952 if (!data
.autinc_from
&& CONSTANT_P (from_addr
))
953 data
.from_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (from_addr_mode
, from_addr
);
954 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_to
)
956 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
957 plus_constant (to_addr_mode
,
960 data
.explicit_inc_to
= -1;
962 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_to
)
964 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
966 data
.explicit_inc_to
= 1;
968 if (!data
.autinc_to
&& CONSTANT_P (to_addr
))
969 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
972 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (MOVE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
974 /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
975 successively smaller modes. */
977 while (max_size
> 1 && data
.len
> 0)
979 enum machine_mode mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
981 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
984 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
985 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
&& align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
986 move_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode
), mode
, &data
);
988 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
991 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
992 gcc_assert (!data
.len
);
998 gcc_assert (!data
.reverse
);
1003 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
.explicit_inc_to
> 0)
1004 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
.to_addr
, constm1_rtx
));
1006 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
1007 plus_constant (to_addr_mode
,
1011 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.to_addr
,
1018 to1
= adjust_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.offset
);
1026 /* Return number of insns required to move L bytes by pieces.
1027 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume. */
1029 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
1030 move_by_pieces_ninsns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l
, unsigned int align
,
1031 unsigned int max_size
)
1033 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n_insns
= 0;
1035 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (MOVE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
1037 while (max_size
> 1 && l
> 0)
1039 enum machine_mode mode
;
1040 enum insn_code icode
;
1042 mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
1044 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
1047 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
1048 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
&& align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
1049 n_insns
+= l
/ GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
), l
%= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1051 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1058 /* Subroutine of move_by_pieces. Move as many bytes as appropriate
1059 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
1060 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
1063 move_by_pieces_1 (insn_gen_fn genfun
, machine_mode mode
,
1064 struct move_by_pieces_d
*data
)
1066 unsigned int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1067 rtx to1
= NULL_RTX
, from1
;
1069 while (data
->len
>= size
)
1072 data
->offset
-= size
;
1076 if (data
->autinc_to
)
1077 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->to_addr
,
1080 to1
= adjust_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->offset
);
1083 if (data
->autinc_from
)
1084 from1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
->from
, mode
, data
->from_addr
,
1087 from1
= adjust_address (data
->from
, mode
, data
->offset
);
1089 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
< 0)
1090 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
,
1091 gen_int_mode (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
) size
,
1092 GET_MODE (data
->to_addr
))));
1093 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_from
< 0)
1094 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->from_addr
,
1095 gen_int_mode (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
) size
,
1096 GET_MODE (data
->from_addr
))));
1099 emit_insn ((*genfun
) (to1
, from1
));
1102 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
1103 emit_single_push_insn (mode
, from1
, NULL
);
1109 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
> 0)
1110 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
,
1112 GET_MODE (data
->to_addr
))));
1113 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_from
> 0)
1114 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->from_addr
,
1116 GET_MODE (data
->from_addr
))));
1118 if (! data
->reverse
)
1119 data
->offset
+= size
;
1125 /* Emit code to move a block Y to a block X. This may be done with
1126 string-move instructions, with multiple scalar move instructions,
1127 or with a library call.
1129 Both X and Y must be MEM rtx's (perhaps inside VOLATILE) with mode BLKmode.
1130 SIZE is an rtx that says how long they are.
1131 ALIGN is the maximum alignment we can assume they have.
1132 METHOD describes what kind of copy this is, and what mechanisms may be used.
1133 MIN_SIZE is the minimal size of block to move
1134 MAX_SIZE is the maximal size of block to move, if it can not be represented
1135 in unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, than it is mask of all ones.
1137 Return the address of the new block, if memcpy is called and returns it,
1141 emit_block_move_hints (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
,
1142 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
,
1143 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT min_size
,
1144 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT max_size
,
1145 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT probable_max_size
)
1152 if (CONST_INT_P (size
)
1153 && INTVAL (size
) == 0)
1158 case BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
:
1159 case BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
:
1160 may_use_call
= true;
1163 case BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
:
1164 may_use_call
= block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm ();
1166 /* Make inhibit_defer_pop nonzero around the library call
1167 to force it to pop the arguments right away. */
1171 case BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL
:
1172 may_use_call
= false;
1179 gcc_assert (MEM_P (x
) && MEM_P (y
));
1180 align
= MIN (MEM_ALIGN (x
), MEM_ALIGN (y
));
1181 gcc_assert (align
>= BITS_PER_UNIT
);
1183 /* Make sure we've got BLKmode addresses; store_one_arg can decide that
1184 block copy is more efficient for other large modes, e.g. DCmode. */
1185 x
= adjust_address (x
, BLKmode
, 0);
1186 y
= adjust_address (y
, BLKmode
, 0);
1188 /* Set MEM_SIZE as appropriate for this block copy. The main place this
1189 can be incorrect is coming from __builtin_memcpy. */
1190 if (CONST_INT_P (size
))
1192 x
= shallow_copy_rtx (x
);
1193 y
= shallow_copy_rtx (y
);
1194 set_mem_size (x
, INTVAL (size
));
1195 set_mem_size (y
, INTVAL (size
));
1198 if (CONST_INT_P (size
) && MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size
), align
))
1199 move_by_pieces (x
, y
, INTVAL (size
), align
, 0);
1200 else if (emit_block_move_via_movmem (x
, y
, size
, align
,
1201 expected_align
, expected_size
,
1202 min_size
, max_size
, probable_max_size
))
1204 else if (may_use_call
1205 && ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x
))
1206 && ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y
)))
1208 /* Since x and y are passed to a libcall, mark the corresponding
1209 tree EXPR as addressable. */
1210 tree y_expr
= MEM_EXPR (y
);
1211 tree x_expr
= MEM_EXPR (x
);
1213 mark_addressable (y_expr
);
1215 mark_addressable (x_expr
);
1216 retval
= emit_block_move_via_libcall (x
, y
, size
,
1217 method
== BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
);
1221 emit_block_move_via_loop (x
, y
, size
, align
);
1223 if (method
== BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
)
1230 emit_block_move (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
)
1232 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT max
, min
= 0;
1233 if (GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
)
1234 min
= max
= UINTVAL (size
);
1236 max
= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (size
));
1237 return emit_block_move_hints (x
, y
, size
, method
, 0, -1,
1241 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Returns true if calling the
1242 block move libcall will not clobber any parameters which may have
1243 already been placed on the stack. */
1246 block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void)
1248 #if defined (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE)
1252 /* If arguments are pushed on the stack, then they're safe. */
1256 /* If registers go on the stack anyway, any argument is sure to clobber
1257 an outgoing argument. */
1258 #if defined (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE)
1259 fn
= emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1260 /* Avoid set but not used warning if *REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE doesn't
1261 depend on its argument. */
1263 if (OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE ((!fn
? NULL_TREE
: TREE_TYPE (fn
)))
1264 && REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (fn
) != 0)
1268 /* If any argument goes in memory, then it might clobber an outgoing
1271 CUMULATIVE_ARGS args_so_far_v
;
1272 cumulative_args_t args_so_far
;
1275 fn
= emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1276 INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (args_so_far_v
, TREE_TYPE (fn
), NULL_RTX
, 0, 3);
1277 args_so_far
= pack_cumulative_args (&args_so_far_v
);
1279 arg
= TYPE_ARG_TYPES (TREE_TYPE (fn
));
1280 for ( ; arg
!= void_list_node
; arg
= TREE_CHAIN (arg
))
1282 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_VALUE (arg
));
1283 rtx tmp
= targetm
.calls
.function_arg (args_so_far
, mode
,
1285 if (!tmp
|| !REG_P (tmp
))
1287 if (targetm
.calls
.arg_partial_bytes (args_so_far
, mode
, NULL
, 1))
1289 targetm
.calls
.function_arg_advance (args_so_far
, mode
,
1296 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a movmem pattern;
1297 return true if successful. */
1300 emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
, unsigned int align
,
1301 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
,
1302 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT min_size
,
1303 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT max_size
,
1304 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT probable_max_size
)
1306 int save_volatile_ok
= volatile_ok
;
1307 enum machine_mode mode
;
1309 if (expected_align
< align
)
1310 expected_align
= align
;
1311 if (expected_size
!= -1)
1313 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)expected_size
> probable_max_size
)
1314 expected_size
= probable_max_size
;
1315 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)expected_size
< min_size
)
1316 expected_size
= min_size
;
1319 /* Since this is a move insn, we don't care about volatility. */
1322 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
1323 including more than one in the machine description unless
1324 the more limited one has some advantage. */
1326 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
1327 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
1329 enum insn_code code
= direct_optab_handler (movmem_optab
, mode
);
1331 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
1332 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT
1333 here because if SIZE is less than the mode mask, as it is
1334 returned by the macro, it will definitely be less than the
1335 actual mode mask. Since SIZE is within the Pmode address
1336 space, we limit MODE to Pmode. */
1337 && ((CONST_INT_P (size
)
1338 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (size
)
1339 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)))
1340 || max_size
<= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)
1341 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (Pmode
)))
1343 struct expand_operand ops
[9];
1346 /* ??? When called via emit_block_move_for_call, it'd be
1347 nice if there were some way to inform the backend, so
1348 that it doesn't fail the expansion because it thinks
1349 emitting the libcall would be more efficient. */
1350 nops
= insn_data
[(int) code
].n_generator_args
;
1351 gcc_assert (nops
== 4 || nops
== 6 || nops
== 8 || nops
== 9);
1353 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], x
);
1354 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[1], y
);
1355 /* The check above guarantees that this size conversion is valid. */
1356 create_convert_operand_to (&ops
[2], size
, mode
, true);
1357 create_integer_operand (&ops
[3], align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
1360 create_integer_operand (&ops
[4], expected_align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
1361 create_integer_operand (&ops
[5], expected_size
);
1365 create_integer_operand (&ops
[6], min_size
);
1366 /* If we can not represent the maximal size,
1367 make parameter NULL. */
1368 if ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) max_size
!= -1)
1369 create_integer_operand (&ops
[7], max_size
);
1371 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[7], NULL
);
1375 /* If we can not represent the maximal size,
1376 make parameter NULL. */
1377 if ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) probable_max_size
!= -1)
1378 create_integer_operand (&ops
[8], probable_max_size
);
1380 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[8], NULL
);
1382 if (maybe_expand_insn (code
, nops
, ops
))
1384 volatile_ok
= save_volatile_ok
;
1390 volatile_ok
= save_volatile_ok
;
1394 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a call to memcpy.
1395 Return the return value from memcpy, 0 otherwise. */
1398 emit_block_move_via_libcall (rtx dst
, rtx src
, rtx size
, bool tailcall
)
1400 rtx dst_addr
, src_addr
;
1401 tree call_expr
, fn
, src_tree
, dst_tree
, size_tree
;
1402 enum machine_mode size_mode
;
1405 /* Emit code to copy the addresses of DST and SRC and SIZE into new
1406 pseudos. We can then place those new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and
1409 dst_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (XEXP (dst
, 0));
1410 src_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (XEXP (src
, 0));
1412 dst_addr
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, dst_addr
);
1413 src_addr
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, src_addr
);
1415 dst_tree
= make_tree (ptr_type_node
, dst_addr
);
1416 src_tree
= make_tree (ptr_type_node
, src_addr
);
1418 size_mode
= TYPE_MODE (sizetype
);
1420 size
= convert_to_mode (size_mode
, size
, 1);
1421 size
= copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode
, size
);
1423 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
1424 memcpy in this context. This could be a user call to memcpy and
1425 the user may wish to examine the return value from memcpy. For
1426 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
1427 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */
1429 size_tree
= make_tree (sizetype
, size
);
1431 fn
= emit_block_move_libcall_fn (true);
1432 call_expr
= build_call_expr (fn
, 3, dst_tree
, src_tree
, size_tree
);
1433 CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr
) = tailcall
;
1435 retval
= expand_normal (call_expr
);
1440 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move_via_libcall. Create the tree node
1441 for the function we use for block copies. */
1443 static GTY(()) tree block_move_fn
;
1446 init_block_move_fn (const char *asmspec
)
1450 tree args
, fn
, attrs
, attr_args
;
1452 fn
= get_identifier ("memcpy");
1453 args
= build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node
, ptr_type_node
,
1454 const_ptr_type_node
, sizetype
,
1457 fn
= build_decl (UNKNOWN_LOCATION
, FUNCTION_DECL
, fn
, args
);
1458 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn
) = 1;
1459 TREE_PUBLIC (fn
) = 1;
1460 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn
) = 1;
1461 TREE_NOTHROW (fn
) = 1;
1462 DECL_VISIBILITY (fn
) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT
;
1463 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn
) = 1;
1465 attr_args
= build_tree_list (NULL_TREE
, build_string (1, "1"));
1466 attrs
= tree_cons (get_identifier ("fn spec"), attr_args
, NULL
);
1468 decl_attributes (&fn
, attrs
, ATTR_FLAG_BUILT_IN
);
1474 set_user_assembler_name (block_move_fn
, asmspec
);
1478 emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int for_call
)
1480 static bool emitted_extern
;
1483 init_block_move_fn (NULL
);
1485 if (for_call
&& !emitted_extern
)
1487 emitted_extern
= true;
1488 make_decl_rtl (block_move_fn
);
1491 return block_move_fn
;
1494 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Copy the data via an explicit
1495 loop. This is used only when libcalls are forbidden. */
1496 /* ??? It'd be nice to copy in hunks larger than QImode. */
1499 emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx x
, rtx y
, rtx size
,
1500 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
1502 rtx cmp_label
, top_label
, iter
, x_addr
, y_addr
, tmp
;
1503 enum machine_mode x_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (x
);
1504 enum machine_mode y_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (y
);
1505 enum machine_mode iter_mode
;
1507 iter_mode
= GET_MODE (size
);
1508 if (iter_mode
== VOIDmode
)
1509 iter_mode
= word_mode
;
1511 top_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
1512 cmp_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
1513 iter
= gen_reg_rtx (iter_mode
);
1515 emit_move_insn (iter
, const0_rtx
);
1517 x_addr
= force_operand (XEXP (x
, 0), NULL_RTX
);
1518 y_addr
= force_operand (XEXP (y
, 0), NULL_RTX
);
1519 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
1521 emit_jump (cmp_label
);
1522 emit_label (top_label
);
1524 tmp
= convert_modes (x_addr_mode
, iter_mode
, iter
, true);
1525 x_addr
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, x_addr_mode
, x_addr
, tmp
);
1527 if (x_addr_mode
!= y_addr_mode
)
1528 tmp
= convert_modes (y_addr_mode
, iter_mode
, iter
, true);
1529 y_addr
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, y_addr_mode
, y_addr
, tmp
);
1531 x
= change_address (x
, QImode
, x_addr
);
1532 y
= change_address (y
, QImode
, y_addr
);
1534 emit_move_insn (x
, y
);
1536 tmp
= expand_simple_binop (iter_mode
, PLUS
, iter
, const1_rtx
, iter
,
1537 true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
1539 emit_move_insn (iter
, tmp
);
1541 emit_label (cmp_label
);
1543 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (iter
, size
, LT
, NULL_RTX
, iter_mode
,
1544 true, top_label
, REG_BR_PROB_BASE
* 90 / 100);
1547 /* Copy all or part of a value X into registers starting at REGNO.
1548 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1551 move_block_to_reg (int regno
, rtx x
, int nregs
, enum machine_mode mode
)
1554 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1562 if (CONSTANT_P (x
) && !targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, x
))
1563 x
= validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode
, x
));
1565 /* See if the machine can do this with a load multiple insn. */
1566 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1567 if (HAVE_load_multiple
)
1569 last
= get_last_insn ();
1570 pat
= gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
), x
,
1578 delete_insns_since (last
);
1582 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
1583 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
+ i
),
1584 operand_subword_force (x
, i
, mode
));
1587 /* Copy all or part of a BLKmode value X out of registers starting at REGNO.
1588 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1591 move_block_from_reg (int regno
, rtx x
, int nregs
)
1598 /* See if the machine can do this with a store multiple insn. */
1599 #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
1600 if (HAVE_store_multiple
)
1602 rtx last
= get_last_insn ();
1603 rtx pat
= gen_store_multiple (x
, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
),
1611 delete_insns_since (last
);
1615 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
1617 rtx tem
= operand_subword (x
, i
, 1, BLKmode
);
1621 emit_move_insn (tem
, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
+ i
));
1625 /* Generate a PARALLEL rtx for a new non-consecutive group of registers from
1626 ORIG, where ORIG is a non-consecutive group of registers represented by
1627 a PARALLEL. The clone is identical to the original except in that the
1628 original set of registers is replaced by a new set of pseudo registers.
1629 The new set has the same modes as the original set. */
1632 gen_group_rtx (rtx orig
)
1637 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (orig
) == PARALLEL
);
1639 length
= XVECLEN (orig
, 0);
1640 tmps
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, length
);
1642 /* Skip a NULL entry in first slot. */
1643 i
= XEXP (XVECEXP (orig
, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1;
1648 for (; i
< length
; i
++)
1650 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (orig
, 0, i
), 0));
1651 rtx offset
= XEXP (XVECEXP (orig
, 0, i
), 1);
1653 tmps
[i
] = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode
, gen_reg_rtx (mode
), offset
);
1656 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (orig
), gen_rtvec_v (length
, tmps
));
1659 /* A subroutine of emit_group_load. Arguments as for emit_group_load,
1660 except that values are placed in TMPS[i], and must later be moved
1661 into corresponding XEXP (XVECEXP (DST, 0, i), 0) element. */
1664 emit_group_load_1 (rtx
*tmps
, rtx dst
, rtx orig_src
, tree type
, int ssize
)
1668 enum machine_mode m
= GET_MODE (orig_src
);
1670 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (dst
) == PARALLEL
);
1673 && !SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m
)
1674 && !MEM_P (orig_src
)
1675 && GET_CODE (orig_src
) != CONCAT
)
1677 enum machine_mode imode
= int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_src
));
1678 if (imode
== BLKmode
)
1679 src
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_src
), ssize
);
1681 src
= gen_reg_rtx (imode
);
1682 if (imode
!= BLKmode
)
1683 src
= gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_src
), src
);
1684 emit_move_insn (src
, orig_src
);
1685 /* ...and back again. */
1686 if (imode
!= BLKmode
)
1687 src
= gen_lowpart (imode
, src
);
1688 emit_group_load_1 (tmps
, dst
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1692 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1693 both on the stack and in registers. */
1694 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, 0), 0))
1699 /* Process the pieces. */
1700 for (i
= start
; i
< XVECLEN (dst
, 0); i
++)
1702 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0));
1703 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos
= INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 1));
1704 unsigned int bytelen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1707 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
1708 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
> ssize
)
1710 /* Arrange to shift the fragment to where it belongs.
1711 extract_bit_field loads to the lsb of the reg. */
1713 #ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING
1714 BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_src
), type
, i
== start
)
1715 == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
? upward
: downward
)
1720 shift
= (bytelen
- (ssize
- bytepos
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
;
1721 bytelen
= ssize
- bytepos
;
1722 gcc_assert (bytelen
> 0);
1725 /* If we won't be loading directly from memory, protect the real source
1726 from strange tricks we might play; but make sure that the source can
1727 be loaded directly into the destination. */
1729 if (!MEM_P (orig_src
)
1730 && (!CONSTANT_P (orig_src
)
1731 || (GET_MODE (orig_src
) != mode
1732 && GET_MODE (orig_src
) != VOIDmode
)))
1734 if (GET_MODE (orig_src
) == VOIDmode
)
1735 src
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
1737 src
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (orig_src
));
1739 emit_move_insn (src
, orig_src
);
1742 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
1744 && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (src
))
1745 || MEM_ALIGN (src
) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
1746 && bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) == 0
1747 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
1749 tmps
[i
] = gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
1750 emit_move_insn (tmps
[i
], adjust_address (src
, mode
, bytepos
));
1752 else if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode
)
1753 && GET_MODE (src
) == mode
1754 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
1755 /* Let emit_move_complex do the bulk of the work. */
1757 else if (GET_CODE (src
) == CONCAT
)
1759 unsigned int slen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src
));
1760 unsigned int slen0
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src
, 0)));
1762 if ((bytepos
== 0 && bytelen
== slen0
)
1763 || (bytepos
!= 0 && bytepos
+ bytelen
<= slen
))
1765 /* The following assumes that the concatenated objects all
1766 have the same size. In this case, a simple calculation
1767 can be used to determine the object and the bit field
1769 tmps
[i
] = XEXP (src
, bytepos
/ slen0
);
1770 if (! CONSTANT_P (tmps
[i
])
1771 && (!REG_P (tmps
[i
]) || GET_MODE (tmps
[i
]) != mode
))
1772 tmps
[i
] = extract_bit_field (tmps
[i
], bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1773 (bytepos
% slen0
) * BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1774 1, NULL_RTX
, mode
, mode
);
1780 gcc_assert (!bytepos
);
1781 mem
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src
), slen
);
1782 emit_move_insn (mem
, src
);
1783 tmps
[i
] = extract_bit_field (mem
, bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1784 0, 1, NULL_RTX
, mode
, mode
);
1787 /* FIXME: A SIMD parallel will eventually lead to a subreg of a
1788 SIMD register, which is currently broken. While we get GCC
1789 to emit proper RTL for these cases, let's dump to memory. */
1790 else if (VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dst
))
1793 int slen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src
));
1796 mem
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src
), slen
);
1797 emit_move_insn (mem
, src
);
1798 tmps
[i
] = adjust_address (mem
, mode
, (int) bytepos
);
1800 else if (CONSTANT_P (src
) && GET_MODE (dst
) != BLKmode
1801 && XVECLEN (dst
, 0) > 1)
1802 tmps
[i
] = simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, src
, GET_MODE (dst
), bytepos
);
1803 else if (CONSTANT_P (src
))
1805 HOST_WIDE_INT len
= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
;
1813 gcc_assert (2 * len
== ssize
);
1814 split_double (src
, &first
, &second
);
1821 else if (REG_P (src
) && GET_MODE (src
) == mode
)
1824 tmps
[i
] = extract_bit_field (src
, bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1825 bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, 1, NULL_RTX
,
1829 tmps
[i
] = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, mode
, tmps
[i
],
1834 /* Emit code to move a block SRC of type TYPE to a block DST,
1835 where DST is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL.
1836 SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_SRC in bytes, or -1
1840 emit_group_load (rtx dst
, rtx src
, tree type
, int ssize
)
1845 tmps
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, XVECLEN (dst
, 0));
1846 emit_group_load_1 (tmps
, dst
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1848 /* Copy the extracted pieces into the proper (probable) hard regs. */
1849 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (dst
, 0); i
++)
1851 rtx d
= XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0);
1854 emit_move_insn (d
, tmps
[i
]);
1858 /* Similar, but load SRC into new pseudos in a format that looks like
1859 PARALLEL. This can later be fed to emit_group_move to get things
1860 in the right place. */
1863 emit_group_load_into_temps (rtx parallel
, rtx src
, tree type
, int ssize
)
1868 vec
= rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (parallel
, 0));
1869 emit_group_load_1 (&RTVEC_ELT (vec
, 0), parallel
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1871 /* Convert the vector to look just like the original PARALLEL, except
1872 with the computed values. */
1873 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (parallel
, 0); i
++)
1875 rtx e
= XVECEXP (parallel
, 0, i
);
1876 rtx d
= XEXP (e
, 0);
1880 d
= force_reg (GET_MODE (d
), RTVEC_ELT (vec
, i
));
1881 e
= alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e
), d
, XEXP (e
, 1));
1883 RTVEC_ELT (vec
, i
) = e
;
1886 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (parallel
), vec
);
1889 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to block DST, where SRC and DST are
1890 non-consecutive groups of registers, each represented by a PARALLEL. */
1893 emit_group_move (rtx dst
, rtx src
)
1897 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src
) == PARALLEL
1898 && GET_CODE (dst
) == PARALLEL
1899 && XVECLEN (src
, 0) == XVECLEN (dst
, 0));
1901 /* Skip first entry if NULL. */
1902 for (i
= XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1; i
< XVECLEN (src
, 0); i
++)
1903 emit_move_insn (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0),
1904 XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 0));
1907 /* Move a group of registers represented by a PARALLEL into pseudos. */
1910 emit_group_move_into_temps (rtx src
)
1912 rtvec vec
= rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (src
, 0));
1915 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (src
, 0); i
++)
1917 rtx e
= XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
);
1918 rtx d
= XEXP (e
, 0);
1921 e
= alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e
), copy_to_reg (d
), XEXP (e
, 1));
1922 RTVEC_ELT (vec
, i
) = e
;
1925 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (src
), vec
);
1928 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to a block ORIG_DST of type TYPE,
1929 where SRC is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL.
1930 SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_DST, or -1 if not
1934 emit_group_store (rtx orig_dst
, rtx src
, tree type ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
, int ssize
)
1937 int start
, finish
, i
;
1938 enum machine_mode m
= GET_MODE (orig_dst
);
1940 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src
) == PARALLEL
);
1942 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m
)
1943 && !MEM_P (orig_dst
) && GET_CODE (orig_dst
) != CONCAT
)
1945 enum machine_mode imode
= int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_dst
));
1946 if (imode
== BLKmode
)
1947 dst
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_dst
), ssize
);
1949 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (imode
);
1950 emit_group_store (dst
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1951 if (imode
!= BLKmode
)
1952 dst
= gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_dst
), dst
);
1953 emit_move_insn (orig_dst
, dst
);
1957 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1958 both on the stack and in registers. */
1959 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, 0), 0))
1963 finish
= XVECLEN (src
, 0);
1965 tmps
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, finish
);
1967 /* Copy the (probable) hard regs into pseudos. */
1968 for (i
= start
; i
< finish
; i
++)
1970 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 0);
1971 if (!REG_P (reg
) || REGNO (reg
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
1973 tmps
[i
] = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (reg
));
1974 emit_move_insn (tmps
[i
], reg
);
1980 /* If we won't be storing directly into memory, protect the real destination
1981 from strange tricks we might play. */
1983 if (GET_CODE (dst
) == PARALLEL
)
1987 /* We can get a PARALLEL dst if there is a conditional expression in
1988 a return statement. In that case, the dst and src are the same,
1989 so no action is necessary. */
1990 if (rtx_equal_p (dst
, src
))
1993 /* It is unclear if we can ever reach here, but we may as well handle
1994 it. Allocate a temporary, and split this into a store/load to/from
1997 temp
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dst
), ssize
);
1998 emit_group_store (temp
, src
, type
, ssize
);
1999 emit_group_load (dst
, temp
, type
, ssize
);
2002 else if (!MEM_P (dst
) && GET_CODE (dst
) != CONCAT
)
2004 enum machine_mode outer
= GET_MODE (dst
);
2005 enum machine_mode inner
;
2006 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos
;
2010 if (!REG_P (dst
) || REGNO (dst
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
2011 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (outer
);
2013 /* Make life a bit easier for combine. */
2014 /* If the first element of the vector is the low part
2015 of the destination mode, use a paradoxical subreg to
2016 initialize the destination. */
2019 inner
= GET_MODE (tmps
[start
]);
2020 bytepos
= subreg_lowpart_offset (inner
, outer
);
2021 if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, start
), 1)) == bytepos
)
2023 temp
= simplify_gen_subreg (outer
, tmps
[start
],
2027 emit_move_insn (dst
, temp
);
2034 /* If the first element wasn't the low part, try the last. */
2036 && start
< finish
- 1)
2038 inner
= GET_MODE (tmps
[finish
- 1]);
2039 bytepos
= subreg_lowpart_offset (inner
, outer
);
2040 if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, finish
- 1), 1)) == bytepos
)
2042 temp
= simplify_gen_subreg (outer
, tmps
[finish
- 1],
2046 emit_move_insn (dst
, temp
);
2053 /* Otherwise, simply initialize the result to zero. */
2055 emit_move_insn (dst
, CONST0_RTX (outer
));
2058 /* Process the pieces. */
2059 for (i
= start
; i
< finish
; i
++)
2061 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos
= INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 1));
2062 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (tmps
[i
]);
2063 unsigned int bytelen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2064 unsigned int adj_bytelen
= bytelen
;
2067 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
2068 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
> ssize
)
2069 adj_bytelen
= ssize
- bytepos
;
2071 if (GET_CODE (dst
) == CONCAT
)
2073 if (bytepos
+ adj_bytelen
2074 <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst
, 0))))
2075 dest
= XEXP (dst
, 0);
2076 else if (bytepos
>= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst
, 0))))
2078 bytepos
-= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst
, 0)));
2079 dest
= XEXP (dst
, 1);
2083 enum machine_mode dest_mode
= GET_MODE (dest
);
2084 enum machine_mode tmp_mode
= GET_MODE (tmps
[i
]);
2086 gcc_assert (bytepos
== 0 && XVECLEN (src
, 0));
2088 if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (dest_mode
)
2089 >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmp_mode
))
2091 dest
= assign_stack_temp (dest_mode
,
2092 GET_MODE_SIZE (dest_mode
));
2093 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest
,
2101 dest
= assign_stack_temp (tmp_mode
,
2102 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmp_mode
));
2103 emit_move_insn (dest
, tmps
[i
]);
2104 dst
= adjust_address (dest
, dest_mode
, bytepos
);
2110 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ (HOST_WIDE_INT
) bytelen
> ssize
)
2112 /* store_bit_field always takes its value from the lsb.
2113 Move the fragment to the lsb if it's not already there. */
2115 #ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING
2116 BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_dst
), type
, i
== start
)
2117 == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
? upward
: downward
)
2123 int shift
= (bytelen
- (ssize
- bytepos
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
;
2124 tmps
[i
] = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, mode
, tmps
[i
],
2127 bytelen
= adj_bytelen
;
2130 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
2132 && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (dest
))
2133 || MEM_ALIGN (dest
) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2134 && bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) == 0
2135 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2136 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest
, mode
, bytepos
), tmps
[i
]);
2138 store_bit_field (dest
, bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
2139 0, 0, mode
, tmps
[i
]);
2142 /* Copy from the pseudo into the (probable) hard reg. */
2143 if (orig_dst
!= dst
)
2144 emit_move_insn (orig_dst
, dst
);
2147 /* Return a form of X that does not use a PARALLEL. TYPE is the type
2148 of the value stored in X. */
2151 maybe_emit_group_store (rtx x
, tree type
)
2153 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
2154 gcc_checking_assert (GET_MODE (x
) == VOIDmode
|| GET_MODE (x
) == mode
);
2155 if (GET_CODE (x
) == PARALLEL
)
2157 rtx result
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
2158 emit_group_store (result
, x
, type
, int_size_in_bytes (type
));
2164 /* Copy a BLKmode object of TYPE out of a register SRCREG into TARGET.
2166 This is used on targets that return BLKmode values in registers. */
2169 copy_blkmode_from_reg (rtx target
, rtx srcreg
, tree type
)
2171 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bytes
= int_size_in_bytes (type
);
2172 rtx src
= NULL
, dst
= NULL
;
2173 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
= MIN (TYPE_ALIGN (type
), BITS_PER_WORD
);
2174 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
, xbitpos
, padding_correction
= 0;
2175 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (srcreg
);
2176 enum machine_mode tmode
= GET_MODE (target
);
2177 enum machine_mode copy_mode
;
2179 /* BLKmode registers created in the back-end shouldn't have survived. */
2180 gcc_assert (mode
!= BLKmode
);
2182 /* If the structure doesn't take up a whole number of words, see whether
2183 SRCREG is padded on the left or on the right. If it's on the left,
2184 set PADDING_CORRECTION to the number of bits to skip.
2186 In most ABIs, the structure will be returned at the least end of
2187 the register, which translates to right padding on little-endian
2188 targets and left padding on big-endian targets. The opposite
2189 holds if the structure is returned at the most significant
2190 end of the register. */
2191 if (bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
!= 0
2192 && (targetm
.calls
.return_in_msb (type
)
2194 : BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
))
2196 = (BITS_PER_WORD
- ((bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
) * BITS_PER_UNIT
));
2198 /* We can use a single move if we have an exact mode for the size. */
2199 else if (MEM_P (target
)
2200 && (!SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (target
))
2201 || MEM_ALIGN (target
) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2202 && bytes
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2204 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (target
, mode
, 0), srcreg
);
2208 /* And if we additionally have the same mode for a register. */
2209 else if (REG_P (target
)
2210 && GET_MODE (target
) == mode
2211 && bytes
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2213 emit_move_insn (target
, srcreg
);
2217 /* This code assumes srcreg is at least a full word. If it isn't, copy it
2218 into a new pseudo which is a full word. */
2219 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < UNITS_PER_WORD
)
2221 srcreg
= convert_to_mode (word_mode
, srcreg
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
));
2225 /* Copy the structure BITSIZE bits at a time. If the target lives in
2226 memory, take care of not reading/writing past its end by selecting
2227 a copy mode suited to BITSIZE. This should always be possible given
2230 If the target lives in register, make sure not to select a copy mode
2231 larger than the mode of the register.
2233 We could probably emit more efficient code for machines which do not use
2234 strict alignment, but it doesn't seem worth the effort at the current
2237 copy_mode
= word_mode
;
2240 enum machine_mode mem_mode
= mode_for_size (bitsize
, MODE_INT
, 1);
2241 if (mem_mode
!= BLKmode
)
2242 copy_mode
= mem_mode
;
2244 else if (REG_P (target
) && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (tmode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
2247 for (bitpos
= 0, xbitpos
= padding_correction
;
2248 bitpos
< bytes
* BITS_PER_UNIT
;
2249 bitpos
+= bitsize
, xbitpos
+= bitsize
)
2251 /* We need a new source operand each time xbitpos is on a
2252 word boundary and when xbitpos == padding_correction
2253 (the first time through). */
2254 if (xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0 || xbitpos
== padding_correction
)
2255 src
= operand_subword_force (srcreg
, xbitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
, mode
);
2257 /* We need a new destination operand each time bitpos is on
2259 if (REG_P (target
) && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (tmode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
2261 else if (bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0)
2262 dst
= operand_subword (target
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
, 1, tmode
);
2264 /* Use xbitpos for the source extraction (right justified) and
2265 bitpos for the destination store (left justified). */
2266 store_bit_field (dst
, bitsize
, bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
, 0, 0, copy_mode
,
2267 extract_bit_field (src
, bitsize
,
2268 xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
, 1,
2269 NULL_RTX
, copy_mode
, copy_mode
));
2273 /* Copy BLKmode value SRC into a register of mode MODE. Return the
2274 register if it contains any data, otherwise return null.
2276 This is used on targets that return BLKmode values in registers. */
2279 copy_blkmode_to_reg (enum machine_mode mode
, tree src
)
2282 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
, xbitpos
, padding_correction
= 0, bytes
;
2283 unsigned int bitsize
;
2284 rtx
*dst_words
, dst
, x
, src_word
= NULL_RTX
, dst_word
= NULL_RTX
;
2285 enum machine_mode dst_mode
;
2287 gcc_assert (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (src
)) == BLKmode
);
2289 x
= expand_normal (src
);
2291 bytes
= int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (src
));
2295 /* If the structure doesn't take up a whole number of words, see
2296 whether the register value should be padded on the left or on
2297 the right. Set PADDING_CORRECTION to the number of padding
2298 bits needed on the left side.
2300 In most ABIs, the structure will be returned at the least end of
2301 the register, which translates to right padding on little-endian
2302 targets and left padding on big-endian targets. The opposite
2303 holds if the structure is returned at the most significant
2304 end of the register. */
2305 if (bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
!= 0
2306 && (targetm
.calls
.return_in_msb (TREE_TYPE (src
))
2308 : BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
))
2309 padding_correction
= (BITS_PER_WORD
- ((bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
)
2312 n_regs
= (bytes
+ UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
2313 dst_words
= XALLOCAVEC (rtx
, n_regs
);
2314 bitsize
= MIN (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (src
)), BITS_PER_WORD
);
2316 /* Copy the structure BITSIZE bits at a time. */
2317 for (bitpos
= 0, xbitpos
= padding_correction
;
2318 bitpos
< bytes
* BITS_PER_UNIT
;
2319 bitpos
+= bitsize
, xbitpos
+= bitsize
)
2321 /* We need a new destination pseudo each time xbitpos is
2322 on a word boundary and when xbitpos == padding_correction
2323 (the first time through). */
2324 if (xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0
2325 || xbitpos
== padding_correction
)
2327 /* Generate an appropriate register. */
2328 dst_word
= gen_reg_rtx (word_mode
);
2329 dst_words
[xbitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
] = dst_word
;
2331 /* Clear the destination before we move anything into it. */
2332 emit_move_insn (dst_word
, CONST0_RTX (word_mode
));
2335 /* We need a new source operand each time bitpos is on a word
2337 if (bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0)
2338 src_word
= operand_subword_force (x
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
, BLKmode
);
2340 /* Use bitpos for the source extraction (left justified) and
2341 xbitpos for the destination store (right justified). */
2342 store_bit_field (dst_word
, bitsize
, xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
,
2344 extract_bit_field (src_word
, bitsize
,
2345 bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
, 1,
2346 NULL_RTX
, word_mode
, word_mode
));
2349 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
2351 /* Find the smallest integer mode large enough to hold the
2352 entire structure. */
2353 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
2355 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
2356 /* Have we found a large enough mode? */
2357 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) >= bytes
)
2360 /* A suitable mode should have been found. */
2361 gcc_assert (mode
!= VOIDmode
);
2364 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode
))
2365 dst_mode
= word_mode
;
2368 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (dst_mode
);
2370 for (i
= 0; i
< n_regs
; i
++)
2371 emit_move_insn (operand_subword (dst
, i
, 0, dst_mode
), dst_words
[i
]);
2373 if (mode
!= dst_mode
)
2374 dst
= gen_lowpart (mode
, dst
);
2379 /* Add a USE expression for REG to the (possibly empty) list pointed
2380 to by CALL_FUSAGE. REG must denote a hard register. */
2383 use_reg_mode (rtx
*call_fusage
, rtx reg
, enum machine_mode mode
)
2385 gcc_assert (REG_P (reg
) && REGNO (reg
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
);
2388 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (mode
, gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode
, reg
), *call_fusage
);
2391 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each of NREGS consecutive regs,
2392 starting at REGNO. All of these registers must be hard registers. */
2395 use_regs (rtx
*call_fusage
, int regno
, int nregs
)
2399 gcc_assert (regno
+ nregs
<= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
);
2401 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
2402 use_reg (call_fusage
, regno_reg_rtx
[regno
+ i
]);
2405 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each REG contained in the
2406 PARALLEL REGS. This is for calls that pass values in multiple
2407 non-contiguous locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
2410 use_group_regs (rtx
*call_fusage
, rtx regs
)
2414 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (regs
, 0); i
++)
2416 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (regs
, 0, i
), 0);
2418 /* A NULL entry means the parameter goes both on the stack and in
2419 registers. This can also be a MEM for targets that pass values
2420 partially on the stack and partially in registers. */
2421 if (reg
!= 0 && REG_P (reg
))
2422 use_reg (call_fusage
, reg
);
2426 /* Return the defining gimple statement for SSA_NAME NAME if it is an
2427 assigment and the code of the expresion on the RHS is CODE. Return
2431 get_def_for_expr (tree name
, enum tree_code code
)
2435 if (TREE_CODE (name
) != SSA_NAME
)
2438 def_stmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (name
);
2440 || gimple_assign_rhs_code (def_stmt
) != code
)
2446 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
2447 /* Return the defining gimple statement for SSA_NAME NAME if it is an
2448 assigment and the class of the expresion on the RHS is CLASS. Return
2452 get_def_for_expr_class (tree name
, enum tree_code_class tclass
)
2456 if (TREE_CODE (name
) != SSA_NAME
)
2459 def_stmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (name
);
2461 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (gimple_assign_rhs_code (def_stmt
)) != tclass
)
2469 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes generated by CONSTFUN can be
2470 stored to memory using several move instructions. CONSTFUNDATA is
2471 a pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2472 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. MEMSETP is true if this is
2473 a memset operation and false if it's a copy of a constant string.
2474 Return nonzero if a call to store_by_pieces should succeed. */
2477 can_store_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
,
2478 rtx (*constfun
) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
),
2479 void *constfundata
, unsigned int align
, bool memsetp
)
2481 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l
;
2482 unsigned int max_size
;
2483 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
= 0;
2484 enum machine_mode mode
;
2485 enum insn_code icode
;
2487 /* cst is set but not used if LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT doesn't use it. */
2488 rtx cst ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
;
2494 ? SET_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
)
2495 : STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
)))
2498 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (STORE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
2500 /* We would first store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2501 successively smaller modes. */
2504 reverse
<= (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
|| HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
);
2508 max_size
= STORE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
2509 while (max_size
> 1 && l
> 0)
2511 mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
2513 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
2516 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
2517 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
2518 && align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2520 unsigned int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2527 cst
= (*constfun
) (constfundata
, offset
, mode
);
2528 if (!targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, cst
))
2538 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2541 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2548 /* Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes generated by
2549 CONSTFUN to block TO. (A MEM rtx with BLKmode). CONSTFUNDATA is a
2550 pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2551 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. MEMSETP is true if this is
2552 a memset operation and false if it's a copy of a constant string.
2553 If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala
2554 mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala
2558 store_by_pieces (rtx to
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
,
2559 rtx (*constfun
) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT
, enum machine_mode
),
2560 void *constfundata
, unsigned int align
, bool memsetp
, int endp
)
2562 enum machine_mode to_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (to
);
2563 struct store_by_pieces_d data
;
2567 gcc_assert (endp
!= 2);
2572 ? SET_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
)
2573 : STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len
, align
));
2574 data
.constfun
= constfun
;
2575 data
.constfundata
= constfundata
;
2578 store_by_pieces_1 (&data
, align
);
2583 gcc_assert (!data
.reverse
);
2588 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
.explicit_inc_to
> 0)
2589 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
.to_addr
, constm1_rtx
));
2591 data
.to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
2592 plus_constant (to_addr_mode
,
2596 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.to_addr
,
2603 to1
= adjust_address (data
.to
, QImode
, data
.offset
);
2611 /* Generate several move instructions to clear LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2612 rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2615 clear_by_pieces (rtx to
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len
, unsigned int align
)
2617 struct store_by_pieces_d data
;
2622 data
.constfun
= clear_by_pieces_1
;
2623 data
.constfundata
= NULL
;
2626 store_by_pieces_1 (&data
, align
);
2629 /* Callback routine for clear_by_pieces.
2630 Return const0_rtx unconditionally. */
2633 clear_by_pieces_1 (void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
2634 HOST_WIDE_INT offset ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
2635 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
2640 /* Subroutine of clear_by_pieces and store_by_pieces.
2641 Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2642 rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2645 store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces_d
*data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
2646 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
2648 enum machine_mode to_addr_mode
= get_address_mode (data
->to
);
2649 rtx to_addr
= XEXP (data
->to
, 0);
2650 unsigned int max_size
= STORE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
2651 enum insn_code icode
;
2654 data
->to_addr
= to_addr
;
2656 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
2657 || GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
2659 data
->explicit_inc_to
= 0;
2661 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
2663 data
->offset
= data
->len
;
2665 /* If storing requires more than two move insns,
2666 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
2667 and use post-increment if available. */
2668 if (!data
->autinc_to
2669 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (data
->len
, align
, max_size
) > 2)
2671 /* Determine the main mode we'll be using.
2672 MODE might not be used depending on the definitions of the
2673 USE_* macros below. */
2674 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
2675 = widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
2677 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
->reverse
&& ! data
->autinc_to
)
2679 data
->to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
,
2680 plus_constant (to_addr_mode
,
2683 data
->autinc_to
= 1;
2684 data
->explicit_inc_to
= -1;
2687 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
->reverse
2688 && ! data
->autinc_to
)
2690 data
->to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
2691 data
->autinc_to
= 1;
2692 data
->explicit_inc_to
= 1;
2695 if ( !data
->autinc_to
&& CONSTANT_P (to_addr
))
2696 data
->to_addr
= copy_to_mode_reg (to_addr_mode
, to_addr
);
2699 align
= alignment_for_piecewise_move (STORE_MAX_PIECES
, align
);
2701 /* First store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2702 successively smaller modes. */
2704 while (max_size
> 1 && data
->len
> 0)
2706 enum machine_mode mode
= widest_int_mode_for_size (max_size
);
2708 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
2711 icode
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
2712 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
&& align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
2713 store_by_pieces_2 (GEN_FCN (icode
), mode
, data
);
2715 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2718 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2719 gcc_assert (!data
->len
);
2722 /* Subroutine of store_by_pieces_1. Store as many bytes as appropriate
2723 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
2724 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
2727 store_by_pieces_2 (insn_gen_fn genfun
, machine_mode mode
,
2728 struct store_by_pieces_d
*data
)
2730 unsigned int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2733 while (data
->len
>= size
)
2736 data
->offset
-= size
;
2738 if (data
->autinc_to
)
2739 to1
= adjust_automodify_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->to_addr
,
2742 to1
= adjust_address (data
->to
, mode
, data
->offset
);
2744 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
< 0)
2745 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
,
2746 gen_int_mode (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
) size
,
2747 GET_MODE (data
->to_addr
))));
2749 cst
= (*data
->constfun
) (data
->constfundata
, data
->offset
, mode
);
2750 emit_insn ((*genfun
) (to1
, cst
));
2752 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
> 0)
2753 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
,
2755 GET_MODE (data
->to_addr
))));
2757 if (! data
->reverse
)
2758 data
->offset
+= size
;
2764 /* Write zeros through the storage of OBJECT. If OBJECT has BLKmode, SIZE is
2765 its length in bytes. */
2768 clear_storage_hints (rtx object
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
,
2769 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
,
2770 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT min_size
,
2771 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT max_size
,
2772 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT probable_max_size
)
2774 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (object
);
2777 gcc_assert (method
== BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
|| method
== BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
);
2779 /* If OBJECT is not BLKmode and SIZE is the same size as its mode,
2780 just move a zero. Otherwise, do this a piece at a time. */
2782 && CONST_INT_P (size
)
2783 && INTVAL (size
) == (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2785 rtx zero
= CONST0_RTX (mode
);
2788 emit_move_insn (object
, zero
);
2792 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode
))
2794 zero
= CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode
));
2797 write_complex_part (object
, zero
, 0);
2798 write_complex_part (object
, zero
, 1);
2804 if (size
== const0_rtx
)
2807 align
= MEM_ALIGN (object
);
2809 if (CONST_INT_P (size
)
2810 && CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size
), align
))
2811 clear_by_pieces (object
, INTVAL (size
), align
);
2812 else if (set_storage_via_setmem (object
, size
, const0_rtx
, align
,
2813 expected_align
, expected_size
,
2814 min_size
, max_size
, probable_max_size
))
2816 else if (ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (object
)))
2817 return set_storage_via_libcall (object
, size
, const0_rtx
,
2818 method
== BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL
);
2826 clear_storage (rtx object
, rtx size
, enum block_op_methods method
)
2828 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT max
, min
= 0;
2829 if (GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
)
2830 min
= max
= UINTVAL (size
);
2832 max
= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (size
));
2833 return clear_storage_hints (object
, size
, method
, 0, -1, min
, max
, max
);
2837 /* A subroutine of clear_storage. Expand a call to memset.
2838 Return the return value of memset, 0 otherwise. */
2841 set_storage_via_libcall (rtx object
, rtx size
, rtx val
, bool tailcall
)
2843 tree call_expr
, fn
, object_tree
, size_tree
, val_tree
;
2844 enum machine_mode size_mode
;
2847 /* Emit code to copy OBJECT and SIZE into new pseudos. We can then
2848 place those into new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and use them later. */
2850 object
= copy_addr_to_reg (XEXP (object
, 0));
2852 size_mode
= TYPE_MODE (sizetype
);
2853 size
= convert_to_mode (size_mode
, size
, 1);
2854 size
= copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode
, size
);
2856 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
2857 memset in this context. This could be a user call to memset and
2858 the user may wish to examine the return value from memset. For
2859 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
2860 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */
2862 object_tree
= make_tree (ptr_type_node
, object
);
2863 if (!CONST_INT_P (val
))
2864 val
= convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
), val
, 1);
2865 size_tree
= make_tree (sizetype
, size
);
2866 val_tree
= make_tree (integer_type_node
, val
);
2868 fn
= clear_storage_libcall_fn (true);
2869 call_expr
= build_call_expr (fn
, 3, object_tree
, val_tree
, size_tree
);
2870 CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr
) = tailcall
;
2872 retval
= expand_normal (call_expr
);
2877 /* A subroutine of set_storage_via_libcall. Create the tree node
2878 for the function we use for block clears. */
2880 tree block_clear_fn
;
2883 init_block_clear_fn (const char *asmspec
)
2885 if (!block_clear_fn
)
2889 fn
= get_identifier ("memset");
2890 args
= build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node
, ptr_type_node
,
2891 integer_type_node
, sizetype
,
2894 fn
= build_decl (UNKNOWN_LOCATION
, FUNCTION_DECL
, fn
, args
);
2895 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn
) = 1;
2896 TREE_PUBLIC (fn
) = 1;
2897 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn
) = 1;
2898 TREE_NOTHROW (fn
) = 1;
2899 DECL_VISIBILITY (fn
) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT
;
2900 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn
) = 1;
2902 block_clear_fn
= fn
;
2906 set_user_assembler_name (block_clear_fn
, asmspec
);
2910 clear_storage_libcall_fn (int for_call
)
2912 static bool emitted_extern
;
2914 if (!block_clear_fn
)
2915 init_block_clear_fn (NULL
);
2917 if (for_call
&& !emitted_extern
)
2919 emitted_extern
= true;
2920 make_decl_rtl (block_clear_fn
);
2923 return block_clear_fn
;
2926 /* Expand a setmem pattern; return true if successful. */
2929 set_storage_via_setmem (rtx object
, rtx size
, rtx val
, unsigned int align
,
2930 unsigned int expected_align
, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size
,
2931 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT min_size
,
2932 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT max_size
,
2933 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT probable_max_size
)
2935 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
2936 including more than one in the machine description unless
2937 the more limited one has some advantage. */
2939 enum machine_mode mode
;
2941 if (expected_align
< align
)
2942 expected_align
= align
;
2943 if (expected_size
!= -1)
2945 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)expected_size
> max_size
)
2946 expected_size
= max_size
;
2947 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
)expected_size
< min_size
)
2948 expected_size
= min_size
;
2951 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
2952 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
2954 enum insn_code code
= direct_optab_handler (setmem_optab
, mode
);
2956 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
2957 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT
2958 here because if SIZE is less than the mode mask, as it is
2959 returned by the macro, it will definitely be less than the
2960 actual mode mask. Since SIZE is within the Pmode address
2961 space, we limit MODE to Pmode. */
2962 && ((CONST_INT_P (size
)
2963 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (size
)
2964 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)))
2965 || max_size
<= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)
2966 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (Pmode
)))
2968 struct expand_operand ops
[9];
2971 nops
= insn_data
[(int) code
].n_generator_args
;
2972 gcc_assert (nops
== 4 || nops
== 6 || nops
== 8 || nops
== 9);
2974 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], object
);
2975 /* The check above guarantees that this size conversion is valid. */
2976 create_convert_operand_to (&ops
[1], size
, mode
, true);
2977 create_convert_operand_from (&ops
[2], val
, byte_mode
, true);
2978 create_integer_operand (&ops
[3], align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
2981 create_integer_operand (&ops
[4], expected_align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
2982 create_integer_operand (&ops
[5], expected_size
);
2986 create_integer_operand (&ops
[6], min_size
);
2987 /* If we can not represent the maximal size,
2988 make parameter NULL. */
2989 if ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) max_size
!= -1)
2990 create_integer_operand (&ops
[7], max_size
);
2992 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[7], NULL
);
2996 /* If we can not represent the maximal size,
2997 make parameter NULL. */
2998 if ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) probable_max_size
!= -1)
2999 create_integer_operand (&ops
[8], probable_max_size
);
3001 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[8], NULL
);
3003 if (maybe_expand_insn (code
, nops
, ops
))
3012 /* Write to one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Write VAL to
3013 the real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if its true. */
3016 write_complex_part (rtx cplx
, rtx val
, bool imag_p
)
3018 enum machine_mode cmode
;
3019 enum machine_mode imode
;
3022 if (GET_CODE (cplx
) == CONCAT
)
3024 emit_move_insn (XEXP (cplx
, imag_p
), val
);
3028 cmode
= GET_MODE (cplx
);
3029 imode
= GET_MODE_INNER (cmode
);
3030 ibitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode
);
3032 /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address
3033 because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent
3034 by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking
3035 adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an
3036 invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */
3039 emit_move_insn (adjust_address_nv (cplx
, imode
,
3040 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0),
3045 /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging
3046 will work. This special case is important, since store_bit_field
3047 wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to
3048 correspond to TCmode. */
3049 if (ibitsize
>= BITS_PER_WORD
3050 /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split
3051 the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs.
3052 This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms
3053 where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */
3055 && REGNO (cplx
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3056 && hard_regno_nregs
[REGNO (cplx
)][cmode
] % 2 == 0))
3058 rtx part
= simplify_gen_subreg (imode
, cplx
, cmode
,
3059 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0);
3062 emit_move_insn (part
, val
);
3066 /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */
3067 gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx
) && ibitsize
< BITS_PER_WORD
);
3070 store_bit_field (cplx
, ibitsize
, imag_p
? ibitsize
: 0, 0, 0, imode
, val
);
3073 /* Extract one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Extract the
3074 real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if it's true. */
3077 read_complex_part (rtx cplx
, bool imag_p
)
3079 enum machine_mode cmode
, imode
;
3082 if (GET_CODE (cplx
) == CONCAT
)
3083 return XEXP (cplx
, imag_p
);
3085 cmode
= GET_MODE (cplx
);
3086 imode
= GET_MODE_INNER (cmode
);
3087 ibitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode
);
3089 /* Special case reads from complex constants that got spilled to memory. */
3090 if (MEM_P (cplx
) && GET_CODE (XEXP (cplx
, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
)
3092 tree decl
= SYMBOL_REF_DECL (XEXP (cplx
, 0));
3093 if (decl
&& TREE_CODE (decl
) == COMPLEX_CST
)
3095 tree part
= imag_p
? TREE_IMAGPART (decl
) : TREE_REALPART (decl
);
3096 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (part
))
3097 return expand_expr (part
, NULL_RTX
, imode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
3101 /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address
3102 because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent
3103 by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking
3104 adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an
3105 invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */
3107 return adjust_address_nv (cplx
, imode
,
3108 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0);
3110 /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging
3111 will work. This special case is important, since extract_bit_field
3112 wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to
3113 correspond to TCmode. */
3114 if (ibitsize
>= BITS_PER_WORD
3115 /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split
3116 the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs.
3117 This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms
3118 where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */
3120 && REGNO (cplx
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3121 && hard_regno_nregs
[REGNO (cplx
)][cmode
] % 2 == 0))
3123 rtx ret
= simplify_gen_subreg (imode
, cplx
, cmode
,
3124 imag_p
? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
) : 0);
3128 /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */
3129 gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx
) && ibitsize
< BITS_PER_WORD
);
3132 return extract_bit_field (cplx
, ibitsize
, imag_p
? ibitsize
: 0,
3133 true, NULL_RTX
, imode
, imode
);
3136 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Yet another lowpart generator.
3137 NEW_MODE and OLD_MODE are the same size. Return NULL if X cannot be
3138 represented in NEW_MODE. If FORCE is true, this will never happen, as
3139 we'll force-create a SUBREG if needed. */
3142 emit_move_change_mode (enum machine_mode new_mode
,
3143 enum machine_mode old_mode
, rtx x
, bool force
)
3147 if (push_operand (x
, GET_MODE (x
)))
3149 ret
= gen_rtx_MEM (new_mode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
3150 MEM_COPY_ATTRIBUTES (ret
, x
);
3154 /* We don't have to worry about changing the address since the
3155 size in bytes is supposed to be the same. */
3156 if (reload_in_progress
)
3158 /* Copy the MEM to change the mode and move any
3159 substitutions from the old MEM to the new one. */
3160 ret
= adjust_address_nv (x
, new_mode
, 0);
3161 copy_replacements (x
, ret
);
3164 ret
= adjust_address (x
, new_mode
, 0);
3168 /* Note that we do want simplify_subreg's behavior of validating
3169 that the new mode is ok for a hard register. If we were to use
3170 simplify_gen_subreg, we would create the subreg, but would
3171 probably run into the target not being able to implement it. */
3172 /* Except, of course, when FORCE is true, when this is exactly what
3173 we want. Which is needed for CCmodes on some targets. */
3175 ret
= simplify_gen_subreg (new_mode
, x
, old_mode
, 0);
3177 ret
= simplify_subreg (new_mode
, x
, old_mode
, 0);
3183 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X using
3184 an integer mode of the same size as MODE. Returns the instruction
3185 emitted, or NULL if such a move could not be generated. */
3188 emit_move_via_integer (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
, bool force
)
3190 enum machine_mode imode
;
3191 enum insn_code code
;
3193 /* There must exist a mode of the exact size we require. */
3194 imode
= int_mode_for_mode (mode
);
3195 if (imode
== BLKmode
)
3198 /* The target must support moves in this mode. */
3199 code
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, imode
);
3200 if (code
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3203 x
= emit_move_change_mode (imode
, mode
, x
, force
);
3206 y
= emit_move_change_mode (imode
, mode
, y
, force
);
3209 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code
) (x
, y
));
3212 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. X is a push_operand in MODE.
3213 Return an equivalent MEM that does not use an auto-increment. */
3216 emit_move_resolve_push (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
)
3218 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0));
3219 HOST_WIDE_INT adjust
;
3222 adjust
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
3223 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3224 adjust
= PUSH_ROUNDING (adjust
);
3226 if (code
== PRE_DEC
|| code
== POST_DEC
)
3228 else if (code
== PRE_MODIFY
|| code
== POST_MODIFY
)
3230 rtx expr
= XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 1);
3233 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (expr
) == PLUS
|| GET_CODE (expr
) == MINUS
);
3234 gcc_assert (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (expr
, 1)));
3235 val
= INTVAL (XEXP (expr
, 1));
3236 if (GET_CODE (expr
) == MINUS
)
3238 gcc_assert (adjust
== val
|| adjust
== -val
);
3242 /* Do not use anti_adjust_stack, since we don't want to update
3243 stack_pointer_delta. */
3244 temp
= expand_simple_binop (Pmode
, PLUS
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
3245 gen_int_mode (adjust
, Pmode
), stack_pointer_rtx
,
3246 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
3247 if (temp
!= stack_pointer_rtx
)
3248 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx
, temp
);
3255 temp
= stack_pointer_rtx
;
3260 temp
= plus_constant (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
, -adjust
);
3266 return replace_equiv_address (x
, temp
);
3269 /* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Generate a move from Y into X.
3270 X is known to satisfy push_operand, and MODE is known to be complex.
3271 Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3274 emit_move_complex_push (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3276 enum machine_mode submode
= GET_MODE_INNER (mode
);
3279 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3280 unsigned int submodesize
= GET_MODE_SIZE (submode
);
3282 /* In case we output to the stack, but the size is smaller than the
3283 machine can push exactly, we need to use move instructions. */
3284 if (PUSH_ROUNDING (submodesize
) != submodesize
)
3286 x
= emit_move_resolve_push (mode
, x
);
3287 return emit_move_insn (x
, y
);
3291 /* Note that the real part always precedes the imag part in memory
3292 regardless of machine's endianness. */
3293 switch (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)))
3307 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode
, XEXP (x
, 0)),
3308 read_complex_part (y
, imag_first
));
3309 return emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode
, XEXP (x
, 0)),
3310 read_complex_part (y
, !imag_first
));
3313 /* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Perform the move from Y to X
3314 via two moves of the parts. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3317 emit_move_complex_parts (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3319 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3320 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3321 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values. */
3322 if (!reload_completed
&& !reload_in_progress
3323 && REG_P (x
) && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x
, y
))
3326 write_complex_part (x
, read_complex_part (y
, false), false);
3327 write_complex_part (x
, read_complex_part (y
, true), true);
3329 return get_last_insn ();
3332 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3333 MODE is known to be complex. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3336 emit_move_complex (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3340 /* Need to take special care for pushes, to maintain proper ordering
3341 of the data, and possibly extra padding. */
3342 if (push_operand (x
, mode
))
3343 return emit_move_complex_push (mode
, x
, y
);
3345 /* See if we can coerce the target into moving both values at once, except
3346 for floating point where we favor moving as parts if this is easy. */
3347 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
3348 && optab_handler (mov_optab
, GET_MODE_INNER (mode
)) != CODE_FOR_nothing
3350 && HARD_REGISTER_P (x
)
3351 && hard_regno_nregs
[REGNO (x
)][mode
] == 1)
3353 && HARD_REGISTER_P (y
)
3354 && hard_regno_nregs
[REGNO (y
)][mode
] == 1))
3356 /* Not possible if the values are inherently not adjacent. */
3357 else if (GET_CODE (x
) == CONCAT
|| GET_CODE (y
) == CONCAT
)
3359 /* Is possible if both are registers (or subregs of registers). */
3360 else if (register_operand (x
, mode
) && register_operand (y
, mode
))
3362 /* If one of the operands is a memory, and alignment constraints
3363 are friendly enough, we may be able to do combined memory operations.
3364 We do not attempt this if Y is a constant because that combination is
3365 usually better with the by-parts thing below. */
3366 else if ((MEM_P (x
) ? !CONSTANT_P (y
) : MEM_P (y
))
3367 && (!STRICT_ALIGNMENT
3368 || get_mode_alignment (mode
) == BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
))
3377 /* For memory to memory moves, optimal behavior can be had with the
3378 existing block move logic. */
3379 if (MEM_P (x
) && MEM_P (y
))
3381 emit_block_move (x
, y
, GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)),
3382 BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL
);
3383 return get_last_insn ();
3386 ret
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, true);
3391 return emit_move_complex_parts (x
, y
);
3394 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3395 MODE is known to be MODE_CC. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3398 emit_move_ccmode (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3402 /* Assume all MODE_CC modes are equivalent; if we have movcc, use it. */
3405 enum insn_code code
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, CCmode
);
3406 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3408 x
= emit_move_change_mode (CCmode
, mode
, x
, true);
3409 y
= emit_move_change_mode (CCmode
, mode
, y
, true);
3410 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code
) (x
, y
));
3414 /* Otherwise, find the MODE_INT mode of the same width. */
3415 ret
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, false);
3416 gcc_assert (ret
!= NULL
);
3420 /* Return true if word I of OP lies entirely in the
3421 undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */
3424 undefined_operand_subword_p (const_rtx op
, int i
)
3426 enum machine_mode innermode
, innermostmode
;
3428 if (GET_CODE (op
) != SUBREG
)
3430 innermode
= GET_MODE (op
);
3431 innermostmode
= GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op
));
3432 offset
= i
* UNITS_PER_WORD
+ SUBREG_BYTE (op
);
3433 /* The SUBREG_BYTE represents offset, as if the value were stored in
3434 memory, except for a paradoxical subreg where we define
3435 SUBREG_BYTE to be 0; undo this exception as in
3437 if (SUBREG_BYTE (op
) == 0
3438 && GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode
))
3440 int difference
= (GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode
) - GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode
));
3441 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
3442 offset
+= (difference
/ UNITS_PER_WORD
) * UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3443 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
3444 offset
+= difference
% UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3446 if (offset
>= GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode
)
3447 || offset
<= -GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode
))
3452 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3453 MODE is any multi-word or full-word mode that lacks a move_insn
3454 pattern. Note that you will get better code if you define such
3455 patterns, even if they must turn into multiple assembler instructions. */
3458 emit_move_multi_word (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, rtx y
)
3465 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) >= UNITS_PER_WORD
);
3467 /* If X is a push on the stack, do the push now and replace
3468 X with a reference to the stack pointer. */
3469 if (push_operand (x
, mode
))
3470 x
= emit_move_resolve_push (mode
, x
);
3472 /* If we are in reload, see if either operand is a MEM whose address
3473 is scheduled for replacement. */
3474 if (reload_in_progress
&& MEM_P (x
)
3475 && (inner
= find_replacement (&XEXP (x
, 0))) != XEXP (x
, 0))
3476 x
= replace_equiv_address_nv (x
, inner
);
3477 if (reload_in_progress
&& MEM_P (y
)
3478 && (inner
= find_replacement (&XEXP (y
, 0))) != XEXP (y
, 0))
3479 y
= replace_equiv_address_nv (y
, inner
);
3483 need_clobber
= false;
3485 i
< (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3488 rtx xpart
= operand_subword (x
, i
, 1, mode
);
3491 /* Do not generate code for a move if it would come entirely
3492 from the undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */
3493 if (undefined_operand_subword_p (y
, i
))
3496 ypart
= operand_subword (y
, i
, 1, mode
);
3498 /* If we can't get a part of Y, put Y into memory if it is a
3499 constant. Otherwise, force it into a register. Then we must
3500 be able to get a part of Y. */
3501 if (ypart
== 0 && CONSTANT_P (y
))
3503 y
= use_anchored_address (force_const_mem (mode
, y
));
3504 ypart
= operand_subword (y
, i
, 1, mode
);
3506 else if (ypart
== 0)
3507 ypart
= operand_subword_force (y
, i
, mode
);
3509 gcc_assert (xpart
&& ypart
);
3511 need_clobber
|= (GET_CODE (xpart
) == SUBREG
);
3513 last_insn
= emit_move_insn (xpart
, ypart
);
3519 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3520 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3521 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values.
3522 We never want to emit such a clobber after reload. */
3524 && ! (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
3525 && need_clobber
!= 0)
3533 /* Low level part of emit_move_insn.
3534 Called just like emit_move_insn, but assumes X and Y
3535 are basically valid. */
3538 emit_move_insn_1 (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3540 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
3541 enum insn_code code
;
3543 gcc_assert ((unsigned int) mode
< (unsigned int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE
);
3545 code
= optab_handler (mov_optab
, mode
);
3546 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3547 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code
) (x
, y
));
3549 /* Expand complex moves by moving real part and imag part. */
3550 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode
))
3551 return emit_move_complex (mode
, x
, y
);
3553 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_DECIMAL_FLOAT
3554 || ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
3556 rtx result
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, true);
3558 /* If we can't find an integer mode, use multi words. */
3562 return emit_move_multi_word (mode
, x
, y
);
3565 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_CC
)
3566 return emit_move_ccmode (mode
, x
, y
);
3568 /* Try using a move pattern for the corresponding integer mode. This is
3569 only safe when simplify_subreg can convert MODE constants into integer
3570 constants. At present, it can only do this reliably if the value
3571 fits within a HOST_WIDE_INT. */
3572 if (!CONSTANT_P (y
) || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
3574 rtx ret
= emit_move_via_integer (mode
, x
, y
, lra_in_progress
);
3578 if (! lra_in_progress
|| recog (PATTERN (ret
), ret
, 0) >= 0)
3583 return emit_move_multi_word (mode
, x
, y
);
3586 /* Generate code to copy Y into X.
3587 Both Y and X must have the same mode, except that
3588 Y can be a constant with VOIDmode.
3589 This mode cannot be BLKmode; use emit_block_move for that.
3591 Return the last instruction emitted. */
3594 emit_move_insn (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3596 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
3597 rtx y_cst
= NULL_RTX
;
3600 gcc_assert (mode
!= BLKmode
3601 && (GET_MODE (y
) == mode
|| GET_MODE (y
) == VOIDmode
));
3606 && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x
))
3607 && (last_insn
= compress_float_constant (x
, y
)))
3612 if (!targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, y
))
3614 y
= force_const_mem (mode
, y
);
3616 /* If the target's cannot_force_const_mem prevented the spill,
3617 assume that the target's move expanders will also take care
3618 of the non-legitimate constant. */
3622 y
= use_anchored_address (y
);
3626 /* If X or Y are memory references, verify that their addresses are valid
3629 && (! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0),
3631 && ! push_operand (x
, GET_MODE (x
))))
3632 x
= validize_mem (x
);
3635 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (y
), XEXP (y
, 0),
3636 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y
)))
3637 y
= validize_mem (y
);
3639 gcc_assert (mode
!= BLKmode
);
3641 last_insn
= emit_move_insn_1 (x
, y
);
3643 if (y_cst
&& REG_P (x
)
3644 && (set
= single_set (last_insn
)) != NULL_RTX
3645 && SET_DEST (set
) == x
3646 && ! rtx_equal_p (y_cst
, SET_SRC (set
)))
3647 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn
, REG_EQUAL
, copy_rtx (y_cst
));
3652 /* If Y is representable exactly in a narrower mode, and the target can
3653 perform the extension directly from constant or memory, then emit the
3654 move as an extension. */
3657 compress_float_constant (rtx x
, rtx y
)
3659 enum machine_mode dstmode
= GET_MODE (x
);
3660 enum machine_mode orig_srcmode
= GET_MODE (y
);
3661 enum machine_mode srcmode
;
3663 int oldcost
, newcost
;
3664 bool speed
= optimize_insn_for_speed_p ();
3666 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r
, y
);
3668 if (targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (dstmode
, y
))
3669 oldcost
= set_src_cost (y
, speed
);
3671 oldcost
= set_src_cost (force_const_mem (dstmode
, y
), speed
);
3673 for (srcmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (GET_MODE_CLASS (orig_srcmode
));
3674 srcmode
!= orig_srcmode
;
3675 srcmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode
))
3678 rtx trunc_y
, last_insn
;
3680 /* Skip if the target can't extend this way. */
3681 ic
= can_extend_p (dstmode
, srcmode
, 0);
3682 if (ic
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
3685 /* Skip if the narrowed value isn't exact. */
3686 if (! exact_real_truncate (srcmode
, &r
))
3689 trunc_y
= CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (r
, srcmode
);
3691 if (targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (srcmode
, trunc_y
))
3693 /* Skip if the target needs extra instructions to perform
3695 if (!insn_operand_matches (ic
, 1, trunc_y
))
3697 /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */
3698 newcost
= set_src_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode
, trunc_y
),
3700 if (oldcost
< newcost
)
3703 else if (float_extend_from_mem
[dstmode
][srcmode
])
3705 trunc_y
= force_const_mem (srcmode
, trunc_y
);
3706 /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */
3707 newcost
= set_src_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode
, trunc_y
),
3709 if (oldcost
< newcost
)
3711 trunc_y
= validize_mem (trunc_y
);
3716 /* For CSE's benefit, force the compressed constant pool entry
3717 into a new pseudo. This constant may be used in different modes,
3718 and if not, combine will put things back together for us. */
3719 trunc_y
= force_reg (srcmode
, trunc_y
);
3720 emit_unop_insn (ic
, x
, trunc_y
, UNKNOWN
);
3721 last_insn
= get_last_insn ();
3724 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn
, REG_EQUAL
, y
);
3732 /* Pushing data onto the stack. */
3734 /* Push a block of length SIZE (perhaps variable)
3735 and return an rtx to address the beginning of the block.
3736 The value may be virtual_outgoing_args_rtx.
3738 EXTRA is the number of bytes of padding to push in addition to SIZE.
3739 BELOW nonzero means this padding comes at low addresses;
3740 otherwise, the padding comes at high addresses. */
3743 push_block (rtx size
, int extra
, int below
)
3747 size
= convert_modes (Pmode
, ptr_mode
, size
, 1);
3748 if (CONSTANT_P (size
))
3749 anti_adjust_stack (plus_constant (Pmode
, size
, extra
));
3750 else if (REG_P (size
) && extra
== 0)
3751 anti_adjust_stack (size
);
3754 temp
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, size
);
3756 temp
= expand_binop (Pmode
, add_optab
, temp
,
3757 gen_int_mode (extra
, Pmode
),
3758 temp
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
3759 anti_adjust_stack (temp
);
3762 #ifndef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3768 temp
= virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
;
3769 if (extra
!= 0 && below
)
3770 temp
= plus_constant (Pmode
, temp
, extra
);
3774 if (CONST_INT_P (size
))
3775 temp
= plus_constant (Pmode
, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
3776 -INTVAL (size
) - (below
? 0 : extra
));
3777 else if (extra
!= 0 && !below
)
3778 temp
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
3779 negate_rtx (Pmode
, plus_constant (Pmode
, size
,
3782 temp
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
3783 negate_rtx (Pmode
, size
));
3786 return memory_address (GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
), temp
);
3789 /* A utility routine that returns the base of an auto-inc memory, or NULL. */
3792 mem_autoinc_base (rtx mem
)
3796 rtx addr
= XEXP (mem
, 0);
3797 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (addr
)) == RTX_AUTOINC
)
3798 return XEXP (addr
, 0);
3803 /* A utility routine used here, in reload, and in try_split. The insns
3804 after PREV up to and including LAST are known to adjust the stack,
3805 with a final value of END_ARGS_SIZE. Iterate backward from LAST
3806 placing notes as appropriate. PREV may be NULL, indicating the
3807 entire insn sequence prior to LAST should be scanned.
3809 The set of allowed stack pointer modifications is small:
3810 (1) One or more auto-inc style memory references (aka pushes),
3811 (2) One or more addition/subtraction with the SP as destination,
3812 (3) A single move insn with the SP as destination,
3813 (4) A call_pop insn,
3814 (5) Noreturn call insns if !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS.
3816 Insns in the sequence that do not modify the SP are ignored,
3817 except for noreturn calls.
3819 The return value is the amount of adjustment that can be trivially
3820 verified, via immediate operand or auto-inc. If the adjustment
3821 cannot be trivially extracted, the return value is INT_MIN. */
3824 find_args_size_adjust (rtx insn
)
3829 pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
3832 /* Look for a call_pop pattern. */
3835 /* We have to allow non-call_pop patterns for the case
3836 of emit_single_push_insn of a TLS address. */
3837 if (GET_CODE (pat
) != PARALLEL
)
3840 /* All call_pop have a stack pointer adjust in the parallel.
3841 The call itself is always first, and the stack adjust is
3842 usually last, so search from the end. */
3843 for (i
= XVECLEN (pat
, 0) - 1; i
> 0; --i
)
3845 set
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
3846 if (GET_CODE (set
) != SET
)
3848 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
3849 if (dest
== stack_pointer_rtx
)
3852 /* We'd better have found the stack pointer adjust. */
3855 /* Fall through to process the extracted SET and DEST
3856 as if it was a standalone insn. */
3858 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == SET
)
3860 else if ((set
= single_set (insn
)) != NULL
)
3862 else if (GET_CODE (pat
) == PARALLEL
)
3864 /* ??? Some older ports use a parallel with a stack adjust
3865 and a store for a PUSH_ROUNDING pattern, rather than a
3866 PRE/POST_MODIFY rtx. Don't force them to update yet... */
3867 /* ??? See h8300 and m68k, pushqi1. */
3868 for (i
= XVECLEN (pat
, 0) - 1; i
>= 0; --i
)
3870 set
= XVECEXP (pat
, 0, i
);
3871 if (GET_CODE (set
) != SET
)
3873 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
3874 if (dest
== stack_pointer_rtx
)
3877 /* We do not expect an auto-inc of the sp in the parallel. */
3878 gcc_checking_assert (mem_autoinc_base (dest
) != stack_pointer_rtx
);
3879 gcc_checking_assert (mem_autoinc_base (SET_SRC (set
))
3880 != stack_pointer_rtx
);
3888 dest
= SET_DEST (set
);
3890 /* Look for direct modifications of the stack pointer. */
3891 if (REG_P (dest
) && REGNO (dest
) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
)
3893 /* Look for a trivial adjustment, otherwise assume nothing. */
3894 /* Note that the SPU restore_stack_block pattern refers to
3895 the stack pointer in V4SImode. Consider that non-trivial. */
3896 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest
))
3897 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set
)) == PLUS
3898 && XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 0) == stack_pointer_rtx
3899 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 1)))
3900 return INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (set
), 1));
3901 /* ??? Reload can generate no-op moves, which will be cleaned
3902 up later. Recognize it and continue searching. */
3903 else if (rtx_equal_p (dest
, SET_SRC (set
)))
3906 return HOST_WIDE_INT_MIN
;
3912 /* Otherwise only think about autoinc patterns. */
3913 if (mem_autoinc_base (dest
) == stack_pointer_rtx
)
3916 gcc_checking_assert (mem_autoinc_base (SET_SRC (set
))
3917 != stack_pointer_rtx
);
3919 else if (mem_autoinc_base (SET_SRC (set
)) == stack_pointer_rtx
)
3920 mem
= SET_SRC (set
);
3924 addr
= XEXP (mem
, 0);
3925 switch (GET_CODE (addr
))
3929 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (mem
));
3932 return -GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (mem
));
3935 addr
= XEXP (addr
, 1);
3936 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (addr
) == PLUS
);
3937 gcc_assert (XEXP (addr
, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx
);
3938 gcc_assert (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (addr
, 1)));
3939 return INTVAL (XEXP (addr
, 1));
3947 fixup_args_size_notes (rtx prev
, rtx last
, int end_args_size
)
3949 int args_size
= end_args_size
;
3950 bool saw_unknown
= false;
3953 for (insn
= last
; insn
!= prev
; insn
= PREV_INSN (insn
))
3955 HOST_WIDE_INT this_delta
;
3957 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn
))
3960 this_delta
= find_args_size_adjust (insn
);
3961 if (this_delta
== 0)
3964 || ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3965 || find_reg_note (insn
, REG_NORETURN
, NULL_RTX
) == NULL_RTX
)
3969 gcc_assert (!saw_unknown
);
3970 if (this_delta
== HOST_WIDE_INT_MIN
)
3973 add_reg_note (insn
, REG_ARGS_SIZE
, GEN_INT (args_size
));
3974 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3975 this_delta
= -(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) this_delta
;
3977 args_size
-= this_delta
;
3980 return saw_unknown
? INT_MIN
: args_size
;
3983 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3984 /* Emit single push insn. */
3987 emit_single_push_insn_1 (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, tree type
)
3990 unsigned rounded_size
= PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
3992 enum insn_code icode
;
3994 stack_pointer_delta
+= PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
3995 /* If there is push pattern, use it. Otherwise try old way of throwing
3996 MEM representing push operation to move expander. */
3997 icode
= optab_handler (push_optab
, mode
);
3998 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
4000 struct expand_operand ops
[1];
4002 create_input_operand (&ops
[0], x
, mode
);
4003 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode
, 1, ops
))
4006 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) == rounded_size
)
4007 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_fmt_e (STACK_PUSH_CODE
, Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
4008 /* If we are to pad downward, adjust the stack pointer first and
4009 then store X into the stack location using an offset. This is
4010 because emit_move_insn does not know how to pad; it does not have
4012 else if (FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode
, type
) == downward
)
4014 unsigned padding_size
= rounded_size
- GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
4015 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
;
4017 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx
,
4018 expand_binop (Pmode
,
4019 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
4025 gen_int_mode (rounded_size
, Pmode
),
4026 NULL_RTX
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
));
4028 offset
= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) padding_size
;
4029 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
4030 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_DEC
)
4031 /* We have already decremented the stack pointer, so get the
4033 offset
+= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) rounded_size
;
4035 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_INC
)
4036 /* We have already incremented the stack pointer, so get the
4038 offset
-= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) rounded_size
;
4040 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
4041 gen_int_mode (offset
, Pmode
));
4045 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
4046 /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC. */
4047 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
4048 gen_int_mode (-(HOST_WIDE_INT
) rounded_size
,
4051 /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC. */
4052 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
,
4053 gen_int_mode (rounded_size
, Pmode
));
4055 dest_addr
= gen_rtx_PRE_MODIFY (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
, dest_addr
);
4058 dest
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, dest_addr
);
4062 set_mem_attributes (dest
, type
, 1);
4064 if (flag_optimize_sibling_calls
)
4065 /* Function incoming arguments may overlap with sibling call
4066 outgoing arguments and we cannot allow reordering of reads
4067 from function arguments with stores to outgoing arguments
4068 of sibling calls. */
4069 set_mem_alias_set (dest
, 0);
4071 emit_move_insn (dest
, x
);
4074 /* Emit and annotate a single push insn. */
4077 emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode mode
, rtx x
, tree type
)
4079 int delta
, old_delta
= stack_pointer_delta
;
4080 rtx prev
= get_last_insn ();
4083 emit_single_push_insn_1 (mode
, x
, type
);
4085 last
= get_last_insn ();
4087 /* Notice the common case where we emitted exactly one insn. */
4088 if (PREV_INSN (last
) == prev
)
4090 add_reg_note (last
, REG_ARGS_SIZE
, GEN_INT (stack_pointer_delta
));
4094 delta
= fixup_args_size_notes (prev
, last
, stack_pointer_delta
);
4095 gcc_assert (delta
== INT_MIN
|| delta
== old_delta
);
4099 /* Generate code to push X onto the stack, assuming it has mode MODE and
4101 MODE is redundant except when X is a CONST_INT (since they don't
4103 SIZE is an rtx for the size of data to be copied (in bytes),
4104 needed only if X is BLKmode.
4106 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume.
4108 If PARTIAL and REG are both nonzero, then copy that many of the first
4109 bytes of X into registers starting with REG, and push the rest of X.
4110 The amount of space pushed is decreased by PARTIAL bytes.
4111 REG must be a hard register in this case.
4112 If REG is zero but PARTIAL is not, take any all others actions for an
4113 argument partially in registers, but do not actually load any
4116 EXTRA is the amount in bytes of extra space to leave next to this arg.
4117 This is ignored if an argument block has already been allocated.
4119 On a machine that lacks real push insns, ARGS_ADDR is the address of
4120 the bottom of the argument block for this call. We use indexing off there
4121 to store the arg. On machines with push insns, ARGS_ADDR is 0 when a
4122 argument block has not been preallocated.
4124 ARGS_SO_FAR is the size of args previously pushed for this call.
4126 REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is nonzero if functions require stack space
4127 for arguments passed in registers. If nonzero, it will be the number
4128 of bytes required. */
4131 emit_push_insn (rtx x
, enum machine_mode mode
, tree type
, rtx size
,
4132 unsigned int align
, int partial
, rtx reg
, int extra
,
4133 rtx args_addr
, rtx args_so_far
, int reg_parm_stack_space
,
4137 enum direction stack_direction
4138 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
4144 /* Decide where to pad the argument: `downward' for below,
4145 `upward' for above, or `none' for don't pad it.
4146 Default is below for small data on big-endian machines; else above. */
4147 enum direction where_pad
= FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode
, type
);
4149 /* Invert direction if stack is post-decrement.
4151 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_DEC
)
4152 if (where_pad
!= none
)
4153 where_pad
= (where_pad
== downward
? upward
: downward
);
4158 || (STRICT_ALIGNMENT
&& align
< GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)))
4160 /* Copy a block into the stack, entirely or partially. */
4167 offset
= partial
% (PARM_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4168 used
= partial
- offset
;
4170 if (mode
!= BLKmode
)
4172 /* A value is to be stored in an insufficiently aligned
4173 stack slot; copy via a suitably aligned slot if
4175 size
= GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
4176 if (!MEM_P (xinner
))
4178 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 1, 1);
4179 emit_move_insn (temp
, xinner
);
4186 /* USED is now the # of bytes we need not copy to the stack
4187 because registers will take care of them. */
4190 xinner
= adjust_address (xinner
, BLKmode
, used
);
4192 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
4193 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
4194 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
4195 by setting SKIP to 0. */
4196 skip
= (reg_parm_stack_space
== 0) ? 0 : used
;
4198 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
4199 /* Do it with several push insns if that doesn't take lots of insns
4200 and if there is no difficulty with push insns that skip bytes
4201 on the stack for alignment purposes. */
4204 && CONST_INT_P (size
)
4206 && MEM_ALIGN (xinner
) >= align
4207 && (MOVE_BY_PIECES_P ((unsigned) INTVAL (size
) - used
, align
))
4208 /* Here we avoid the case of a structure whose weak alignment
4209 forces many pushes of a small amount of data,
4210 and such small pushes do rounding that causes trouble. */
4211 && ((! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode
, align
))
4212 || align
>= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
4213 || (PUSH_ROUNDING (align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)
4214 == (align
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)))
4215 && (HOST_WIDE_INT
) PUSH_ROUNDING (INTVAL (size
)) == INTVAL (size
))
4217 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
4218 or if padding below and stack grows up.
4219 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
4220 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
4221 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
4222 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4224 move_by_pieces (NULL
, xinner
, INTVAL (size
) - used
, align
, 0);
4227 #endif /* PUSH_ROUNDING */
4231 /* Otherwise make space on the stack and copy the data
4232 to the address of that space. */
4234 /* Deduct words put into registers from the size we must copy. */
4237 if (CONST_INT_P (size
))
4238 size
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (size
) - used
);
4240 size
= expand_binop (GET_MODE (size
), sub_optab
, size
,
4241 gen_int_mode (used
, GET_MODE (size
)),
4242 NULL_RTX
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
4245 /* Get the address of the stack space.
4246 In this case, we do not deal with EXTRA separately.
4247 A single stack adjust will do. */
4250 temp
= push_block (size
, extra
, where_pad
== downward
);
4253 else if (CONST_INT_P (args_so_far
))
4254 temp
= memory_address (BLKmode
,
4255 plus_constant (Pmode
, args_addr
,
4256 skip
+ INTVAL (args_so_far
)));
4258 temp
= memory_address (BLKmode
,
4259 plus_constant (Pmode
,
4260 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
,
4265 if (!ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
)
4267 /* If the source is referenced relative to the stack pointer,
4268 copy it to another register to stabilize it. We do not need
4269 to do this if we know that we won't be changing sp. */
4271 if (reg_mentioned_p (virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx
, temp
)
4272 || reg_mentioned_p (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
, temp
))
4273 temp
= copy_to_reg (temp
);
4276 target
= gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode
, temp
);
4278 /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments
4279 may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot
4280 allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores
4281 to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want
4282 to record the alignment of the stack slot. */
4283 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
4284 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
4285 set_mem_align (target
, align
);
4287 emit_block_move (target
, xinner
, size
, BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
);
4290 else if (partial
> 0)
4292 /* Scalar partly in registers. */
4294 int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
4297 /* # bytes of start of argument
4298 that we must make space for but need not store. */
4299 int offset
= partial
% (PARM_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4300 int args_offset
= INTVAL (args_so_far
);
4303 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
4304 or if padding below and stack grows up.
4305 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
4306 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
4307 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
4308 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4310 /* If we make space by pushing it, we might as well push
4311 the real data. Otherwise, we can leave OFFSET nonzero
4312 and leave the space uninitialized. */
4316 /* Now NOT_STACK gets the number of words that we don't need to
4317 allocate on the stack. Convert OFFSET to words too. */
4318 not_stack
= (partial
- offset
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
4319 offset
/= UNITS_PER_WORD
;
4321 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
4322 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
4323 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
4324 by setting SKIP to 0. */
4325 skip
= (reg_parm_stack_space
== 0) ? 0 : not_stack
;
4327 if (CONSTANT_P (x
) && !targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode
, x
))
4328 x
= validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode
, x
));
4330 /* If X is a hard register in a non-integer mode, copy it into a pseudo;
4331 SUBREGs of such registers are not allowed. */
4332 if ((REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4333 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x
)) != MODE_INT
))
4334 x
= copy_to_reg (x
);
4336 /* Loop over all the words allocated on the stack for this arg. */
4337 /* We can do it by words, because any scalar bigger than a word
4338 has a size a multiple of a word. */
4339 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
4340 for (i
= not_stack
; i
< size
; i
++)
4342 for (i
= size
- 1; i
>= not_stack
; i
--)
4344 if (i
>= not_stack
+ offset
)
4345 emit_push_insn (operand_subword_force (x
, i
, mode
),
4346 word_mode
, NULL_TREE
, NULL_RTX
, align
, 0, NULL_RTX
,
4348 GEN_INT (args_offset
+ ((i
- not_stack
+ skip
)
4350 reg_parm_stack_space
, alignment_pad
);
4357 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
4358 or if padding below and stack grows up.
4359 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
4360 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
4361 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
4362 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4364 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
4365 if (args_addr
== 0 && PUSH_ARGS
)
4366 emit_single_push_insn (mode
, x
, type
);
4370 if (CONST_INT_P (args_so_far
))
4372 = memory_address (mode
,
4373 plus_constant (Pmode
, args_addr
,
4374 INTVAL (args_so_far
)));
4376 addr
= memory_address (mode
, gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, args_addr
,
4378 dest
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, addr
);
4380 /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments
4381 may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot
4382 allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores
4383 to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want
4384 to record the alignment of the stack slot. */
4385 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
4386 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
4387 set_mem_align (dest
, align
);
4389 emit_move_insn (dest
, x
);
4393 /* If part should go in registers, copy that part
4394 into the appropriate registers. Do this now, at the end,
4395 since mem-to-mem copies above may do function calls. */
4396 if (partial
> 0 && reg
!= 0)
4398 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4399 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4400 if (GET_CODE (reg
) == PARALLEL
)
4401 emit_group_load (reg
, x
, type
, -1);
4404 gcc_assert (partial
% UNITS_PER_WORD
== 0);
4405 move_block_to_reg (REGNO (reg
), x
, partial
/ UNITS_PER_WORD
, mode
);
4409 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0 && where_pad
== stack_direction
)
4410 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
4412 if (alignment_pad
&& args_addr
== 0)
4413 anti_adjust_stack (alignment_pad
);
4416 /* Return X if X can be used as a subtarget in a sequence of arithmetic
4420 get_subtarget (rtx x
)
4424 /* Only registers can be subtargets. */
4426 /* Don't use hard regs to avoid extending their life. */
4427 || REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4431 /* A subroutine of expand_assignment. Optimize FIELD op= VAL, where
4432 FIELD is a bitfield. Returns true if the optimization was successful,
4433 and there's nothing else to do. */
4436 optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
,
4437 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
,
4438 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_start
,
4439 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_end
,
4440 enum machine_mode mode1
, rtx str_rtx
,
4443 enum machine_mode str_mode
= GET_MODE (str_rtx
);
4444 unsigned int str_bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode
);
4449 enum tree_code code
;
4451 if (mode1
!= VOIDmode
4452 || bitsize
>= BITS_PER_WORD
4453 || str_bitsize
> BITS_PER_WORD
4454 || TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (to
)
4455 || TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (to
))
4459 if (TREE_CODE (src
) != SSA_NAME
)
4461 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (src
)) != INTEGER_TYPE
)
4464 srcstmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (src
);
4466 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (gimple_assign_rhs_code (srcstmt
)) != tcc_binary
)
4469 code
= gimple_assign_rhs_code (srcstmt
);
4471 op0
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (srcstmt
);
4473 /* If OP0 is an SSA_NAME, then we want to walk the use-def chain
4474 to find its initialization. Hopefully the initialization will
4475 be from a bitfield load. */
4476 if (TREE_CODE (op0
) == SSA_NAME
)
4478 gimple op0stmt
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (op0
);
4480 /* We want to eventually have OP0 be the same as TO, which
4481 should be a bitfield. */
4483 || !is_gimple_assign (op0stmt
)
4484 || gimple_assign_rhs_code (op0stmt
) != TREE_CODE (to
))
4486 op0
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (op0stmt
);
4489 op1
= gimple_assign_rhs2 (srcstmt
);
4491 if (!operand_equal_p (to
, op0
, 0))
4494 if (MEM_P (str_rtx
))
4496 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT offset1
;
4498 if (str_bitsize
== 0 || str_bitsize
> BITS_PER_WORD
)
4499 str_mode
= word_mode
;
4500 str_mode
= get_best_mode (bitsize
, bitpos
,
4501 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4502 MEM_ALIGN (str_rtx
), str_mode
, 0);
4503 if (str_mode
== VOIDmode
)
4505 str_bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode
);
4508 bitpos
%= str_bitsize
;
4509 offset1
= (offset1
- bitpos
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
;
4510 str_rtx
= adjust_address (str_rtx
, str_mode
, offset1
);
4512 else if (!REG_P (str_rtx
) && GET_CODE (str_rtx
) != SUBREG
)
4515 /* If the bit field covers the whole REG/MEM, store_field
4516 will likely generate better code. */
4517 if (bitsize
>= str_bitsize
)
4520 /* We can't handle fields split across multiple entities. */
4521 if (bitpos
+ bitsize
> str_bitsize
)
4524 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
4525 bitpos
= str_bitsize
- bitpos
- bitsize
;
4531 /* For now, just optimize the case of the topmost bitfield
4532 where we don't need to do any masking and also
4533 1 bit bitfields where xor can be used.
4534 We might win by one instruction for the other bitfields
4535 too if insv/extv instructions aren't used, so that
4536 can be added later. */
4537 if (bitpos
+ bitsize
!= str_bitsize
4538 && (bitsize
!= 1 || TREE_CODE (op1
) != INTEGER_CST
))
4541 value
= expand_expr (op1
, NULL_RTX
, str_mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4542 value
= convert_modes (str_mode
,
4543 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1
)), value
,
4544 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1
)));
4546 /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means
4547 we can alias adjacent data. */
4548 if (MEM_P (str_rtx
))
4550 str_rtx
= shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx
);
4551 set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx
, 0);
4552 set_mem_expr (str_rtx
, 0);
4555 binop
= code
== PLUS_EXPR
? add_optab
: sub_optab
;
4556 if (bitsize
== 1 && bitpos
+ bitsize
!= str_bitsize
)
4558 value
= expand_and (str_mode
, value
, const1_rtx
, NULL
);
4561 value
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, str_mode
, value
, bitpos
, NULL_RTX
, 1);
4562 result
= expand_binop (str_mode
, binop
, str_rtx
,
4563 value
, str_rtx
, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
4564 if (result
!= str_rtx
)
4565 emit_move_insn (str_rtx
, result
);
4570 if (TREE_CODE (op1
) != INTEGER_CST
)
4572 value
= expand_expr (op1
, NULL_RTX
, str_mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4573 value
= convert_modes (str_mode
,
4574 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1
)), value
,
4575 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1
)));
4577 /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means
4578 we can alias adjacent data. */
4579 if (MEM_P (str_rtx
))
4581 str_rtx
= shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx
);
4582 set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx
, 0);
4583 set_mem_expr (str_rtx
, 0);
4586 binop
= code
== BIT_IOR_EXPR
? ior_optab
: xor_optab
;
4587 if (bitpos
+ bitsize
!= str_bitsize
)
4589 rtx mask
= gen_int_mode (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << bitsize
) - 1,
4591 value
= expand_and (str_mode
, value
, mask
, NULL_RTX
);
4593 value
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, str_mode
, value
, bitpos
, NULL_RTX
, 1);
4594 result
= expand_binop (str_mode
, binop
, str_rtx
,
4595 value
, str_rtx
, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
4596 if (result
!= str_rtx
)
4597 emit_move_insn (str_rtx
, result
);
4607 /* In the C++ memory model, consecutive bit fields in a structure are
4608 considered one memory location.
4610 Given a COMPONENT_REF EXP at position (BITPOS, OFFSET), this function
4611 returns the bit range of consecutive bits in which this COMPONENT_REF
4612 belongs. The values are returned in *BITSTART and *BITEND. *BITPOS
4613 and *OFFSET may be adjusted in the process.
4615 If the access does not need to be restricted, 0 is returned in both
4616 *BITSTART and *BITEND. */
4619 get_bit_range (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*bitstart
,
4620 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
*bitend
,
4622 HOST_WIDE_INT
*bitpos
,
4625 HOST_WIDE_INT bitoffset
;
4628 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPONENT_REF
);
4630 field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
4631 repr
= DECL_BIT_FIELD_REPRESENTATIVE (field
);
4632 /* If we do not have a DECL_BIT_FIELD_REPRESENTATIVE there is no
4633 need to limit the range we can access. */
4636 *bitstart
= *bitend
= 0;
4640 /* If we have a DECL_BIT_FIELD_REPRESENTATIVE but the enclosing record is
4641 part of a larger bit field, then the representative does not serve any
4642 useful purpose. This can occur in Ada. */
4643 if (handled_component_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
4645 enum machine_mode rmode
;
4646 HOST_WIDE_INT rbitsize
, rbitpos
;
4650 get_inner_reference (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), &rbitsize
, &rbitpos
,
4651 &roffset
, &rmode
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
);
4652 if ((rbitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) != 0)
4654 *bitstart
= *bitend
= 0;
4659 /* Compute the adjustment to bitpos from the offset of the field
4660 relative to the representative. DECL_FIELD_OFFSET of field and
4661 repr are the same by construction if they are not constants,
4662 see finish_bitfield_layout. */
4663 if (tree_fits_uhwi_p (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field
))
4664 && tree_fits_uhwi_p (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (repr
)))
4665 bitoffset
= (tree_to_uhwi (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field
))
4666 - tree_to_uhwi (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (repr
))) * BITS_PER_UNIT
;
4669 bitoffset
+= (tree_to_uhwi (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field
))
4670 - tree_to_uhwi (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (repr
)));
4672 /* If the adjustment is larger than bitpos, we would have a negative bit
4673 position for the lower bound and this may wreak havoc later. Adjust
4674 offset and bitpos to make the lower bound non-negative in that case. */
4675 if (bitoffset
> *bitpos
)
4677 HOST_WIDE_INT adjust
= bitoffset
- *bitpos
;
4678 gcc_assert ((adjust
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0);
4681 if (*offset
== NULL_TREE
)
4682 *offset
= size_int (-adjust
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4685 = size_binop (MINUS_EXPR
, *offset
, size_int (adjust
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
));
4689 *bitstart
= *bitpos
- bitoffset
;
4691 *bitend
= *bitstart
+ tree_to_uhwi (DECL_SIZE (repr
)) - 1;
4694 /* Returns true if ADDR is an ADDR_EXPR of a DECL that does not reside
4695 in memory and has non-BLKmode. DECL_RTL must not be a MEM; if
4696 DECL_RTL was not set yet, return NORTL. */
4699 addr_expr_of_non_mem_decl_p_1 (tree addr
, bool nortl
)
4701 if (TREE_CODE (addr
) != ADDR_EXPR
)
4704 tree base
= TREE_OPERAND (addr
, 0);
4707 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (base
)
4708 || DECL_MODE (base
) == BLKmode
)
4711 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (base
))
4714 return (!MEM_P (DECL_RTL (base
)));
4717 /* Returns true if the MEM_REF REF refers to an object that does not
4718 reside in memory and has non-BLKmode. */
4721 mem_ref_refers_to_non_mem_p (tree ref
)
4723 tree base
= TREE_OPERAND (ref
, 0);
4724 return addr_expr_of_non_mem_decl_p_1 (base
, false);
4727 /* Expand an assignment that stores the value of FROM into TO. If NONTEMPORAL
4728 is true, try generating a nontemporal store. */
4731 expand_assignment (tree to
, tree from
, bool nontemporal
)
4735 enum machine_mode mode
;
4737 enum insn_code icode
;
4739 /* Don't crash if the lhs of the assignment was erroneous. */
4740 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == ERROR_MARK
)
4742 expand_normal (from
);
4746 /* Optimize away no-op moves without side-effects. */
4747 if (operand_equal_p (to
, from
, 0))
4750 /* Handle misaligned stores. */
4751 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (to
));
4752 if ((TREE_CODE (to
) == MEM_REF
4753 || TREE_CODE (to
) == TARGET_MEM_REF
)
4755 && !mem_ref_refers_to_non_mem_p (to
)
4756 && ((align
= get_object_alignment (to
))
4757 < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
4758 && (((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
4759 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
4760 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, align
)))
4764 reg
= expand_expr (from
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
4765 reg
= force_not_mem (reg
);
4766 mem
= expand_expr (to
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_WRITE
);
4768 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
4770 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
4772 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], mem
);
4773 create_input_operand (&ops
[1], reg
, mode
);
4774 /* The movmisalign<mode> pattern cannot fail, else the assignment
4775 would silently be omitted. */
4776 expand_insn (icode
, 2, ops
);
4779 store_bit_field (mem
, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
),
4780 0, 0, 0, mode
, reg
);
4784 /* Assignment of a structure component needs special treatment
4785 if the structure component's rtx is not simply a MEM.
4786 Assignment of an array element at a constant index, and assignment of
4787 an array element in an unaligned packed structure field, has the same
4788 problem. Same for (partially) storing into a non-memory object. */
4789 if (handled_component_p (to
)
4790 || (TREE_CODE (to
) == MEM_REF
4791 && mem_ref_refers_to_non_mem_p (to
))
4792 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (to
)) == ARRAY_TYPE
)
4794 enum machine_mode mode1
;
4795 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
4796 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_start
= 0;
4797 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_end
= 0;
4804 tem
= get_inner_reference (to
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
, &mode1
,
4805 &unsignedp
, &volatilep
);
4807 /* Make sure bitpos is not negative, it can wreak havoc later. */
4810 gcc_assert (offset
== NULL_TREE
);
4811 offset
= size_int (bitpos
>> (BITS_PER_UNIT
== 8
4812 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
)));
4813 bitpos
&= BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1;
4816 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == COMPONENT_REF
4817 && DECL_BIT_FIELD_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (to
, 1)))
4818 get_bit_range (&bitregion_start
, &bitregion_end
, to
, &bitpos
, &offset
);
4820 to_rtx
= expand_expr (tem
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_WRITE
);
4822 /* If the bitfield is volatile, we want to access it in the
4823 field's mode, not the computed mode.
4824 If a MEM has VOIDmode (external with incomplete type),
4825 use BLKmode for it instead. */
4828 if (volatilep
&& flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0)
4829 to_rtx
= adjust_address (to_rtx
, mode1
, 0);
4830 else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == VOIDmode
)
4831 to_rtx
= adjust_address (to_rtx
, BLKmode
, 0);
4836 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
4839 if (!MEM_P (to_rtx
))
4841 /* We can get constant negative offsets into arrays with broken
4842 user code. Translate this to a trap instead of ICEing. */
4843 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (offset
) == INTEGER_CST
);
4844 expand_builtin_trap ();
4845 to_rtx
= gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode
, const0_rtx
);
4848 offset_rtx
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_SUM
);
4849 address_mode
= get_address_mode (to_rtx
);
4850 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != address_mode
)
4851 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
4853 /* A constant address in TO_RTX can have VOIDmode, we must not try
4854 to call force_reg for that case. Avoid that case. */
4856 && GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == BLKmode
4857 && GET_MODE (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0)) != VOIDmode
4859 && (bitpos
% bitsize
) == 0
4860 && (bitsize
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)) == 0
4861 && MEM_ALIGN (to_rtx
) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
))
4863 to_rtx
= adjust_address (to_rtx
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4867 to_rtx
= offset_address (to_rtx
, offset_rtx
,
4868 highest_pow2_factor_for_target (to
,
4872 /* No action is needed if the target is not a memory and the field
4873 lies completely outside that target. This can occur if the source
4874 code contains an out-of-bounds access to a small array. */
4876 && GET_MODE (to_rtx
) != BLKmode
4877 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) bitpos
4878 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (to_rtx
)))
4880 expand_normal (from
);
4883 /* Handle expand_expr of a complex value returning a CONCAT. */
4884 else if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == CONCAT
)
4886 unsigned short mode_bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (to_rtx
));
4887 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (from
)))
4889 && bitsize
== mode_bitsize
)
4890 result
= store_expr (from
, to_rtx
, false, nontemporal
);
4891 else if (bitsize
== mode_bitsize
/ 2
4892 && (bitpos
== 0 || bitpos
== mode_bitsize
/ 2))
4893 result
= store_expr (from
, XEXP (to_rtx
, bitpos
!= 0), false,
4895 else if (bitpos
+ bitsize
<= mode_bitsize
/ 2)
4896 result
= store_field (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), bitsize
, bitpos
,
4897 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4899 get_alias_set (to
), nontemporal
);
4900 else if (bitpos
>= mode_bitsize
/ 2)
4901 result
= store_field (XEXP (to_rtx
, 1), bitsize
,
4902 bitpos
- mode_bitsize
/ 2,
4903 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4905 get_alias_set (to
), nontemporal
);
4906 else if (bitpos
== 0 && bitsize
== mode_bitsize
)
4909 result
= expand_normal (from
);
4910 from_rtx
= simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (to_rtx
), result
,
4911 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (from
)), 0);
4912 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0),
4913 read_complex_part (from_rtx
, false));
4914 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 1),
4915 read_complex_part (from_rtx
, true));
4919 rtx temp
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (to_rtx
),
4920 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (to_rtx
)));
4921 write_complex_part (temp
, XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), false);
4922 write_complex_part (temp
, XEXP (to_rtx
, 1), true);
4923 result
= store_field (temp
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
4924 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4926 get_alias_set (to
), nontemporal
);
4927 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), read_complex_part (temp
, false));
4928 emit_move_insn (XEXP (to_rtx
, 1), read_complex_part (temp
, true));
4935 /* If the field is at offset zero, we could have been given the
4936 DECL_RTX of the parent struct. Don't munge it. */
4937 to_rtx
= shallow_copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
4938 set_mem_attributes_minus_bitpos (to_rtx
, to
, 0, bitpos
);
4940 MEM_VOLATILE_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
4943 if (optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (bitsize
, bitpos
,
4944 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4949 result
= store_field (to_rtx
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
4950 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
4952 get_alias_set (to
), nontemporal
);
4956 preserve_temp_slots (result
);
4961 /* If the rhs is a function call and its value is not an aggregate,
4962 call the function before we start to compute the lhs.
4963 This is needed for correct code for cases such as
4964 val = setjmp (buf) on machines where reference to val
4965 requires loading up part of an address in a separate insn.
4967 Don't do this if TO is a VAR_DECL or PARM_DECL whose DECL_RTL is REG
4968 since it might be a promoted variable where the zero- or sign- extension
4969 needs to be done. Handling this in the normal way is safe because no
4970 computation is done before the call. The same is true for SSA names. */
4971 if (TREE_CODE (from
) == CALL_EXPR
&& ! aggregate_value_p (from
, from
)
4972 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (from
))
4973 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (from
))) == INTEGER_CST
4974 && ! (((TREE_CODE (to
) == VAR_DECL
4975 || TREE_CODE (to
) == PARM_DECL
4976 || TREE_CODE (to
) == RESULT_DECL
)
4977 && REG_P (DECL_RTL (to
)))
4978 || TREE_CODE (to
) == SSA_NAME
))
4983 value
= expand_normal (from
);
4985 to_rtx
= expand_expr (to
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_WRITE
);
4987 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4988 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4989 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
)
4991 if (GET_CODE (value
) == PARALLEL
)
4992 emit_group_move (to_rtx
, value
);
4994 emit_group_load (to_rtx
, value
, TREE_TYPE (from
),
4995 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from
)));
4997 else if (GET_CODE (value
) == PARALLEL
)
4998 emit_group_store (to_rtx
, value
, TREE_TYPE (from
),
4999 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from
)));
5000 else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == BLKmode
)
5002 /* Handle calls that return BLKmode values in registers. */
5004 copy_blkmode_from_reg (to_rtx
, value
, TREE_TYPE (from
));
5006 emit_block_move (to_rtx
, value
, expr_size (from
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5010 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (to
)))
5011 value
= convert_memory_address_addr_space
5012 (GET_MODE (to_rtx
), value
,
5013 TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (to
))));
5015 emit_move_insn (to_rtx
, value
);
5017 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
5022 /* Ordinary treatment. Expand TO to get a REG or MEM rtx. */
5023 to_rtx
= expand_expr (to
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_WRITE
);
5025 /* Don't move directly into a return register. */
5026 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == RESULT_DECL
5027 && (REG_P (to_rtx
) || GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
))
5033 /* If the source is itself a return value, it still is in a pseudo at
5034 this point so we can move it back to the return register directly. */
5036 && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (from
)) == BLKmode
5037 && TREE_CODE (from
) != CALL_EXPR
)
5038 temp
= copy_blkmode_to_reg (GET_MODE (to_rtx
), from
);
5040 temp
= expand_expr (from
, NULL_RTX
, GET_MODE (to_rtx
), EXPAND_NORMAL
);
5042 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
5043 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
5044 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
)
5046 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == PARALLEL
)
5047 emit_group_move (to_rtx
, temp
);
5049 emit_group_load (to_rtx
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (from
),
5050 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from
)));
5053 emit_move_insn (to_rtx
, temp
);
5055 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
5060 /* In case we are returning the contents of an object which overlaps
5061 the place the value is being stored, use a safe function when copying
5062 a value through a pointer into a structure value return block. */
5063 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == RESULT_DECL
5064 && TREE_CODE (from
) == INDIRECT_REF
5065 && ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC_P
5066 (TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (from
, 0)))))
5067 && refs_may_alias_p (to
, from
)
5068 && cfun
->returns_struct
5069 && !cfun
->returns_pcc_struct
)
5074 size
= expr_size (from
);
5075 from_rtx
= expand_normal (from
);
5077 emit_library_call (memmove_libfunc
, LCT_NORMAL
,
5078 VOIDmode
, 3, XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
5079 XEXP (from_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
5080 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
5081 size
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
)),
5082 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
5084 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
5089 /* Compute FROM and store the value in the rtx we got. */
5092 result
= store_expr (from
, to_rtx
, 0, nontemporal
);
5093 preserve_temp_slots (result
);
5098 /* Emits nontemporal store insn that moves FROM to TO. Returns true if this
5099 succeeded, false otherwise. */
5102 emit_storent_insn (rtx to
, rtx from
)
5104 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
5105 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (to
);
5106 enum insn_code code
= optab_handler (storent_optab
, mode
);
5108 if (code
== CODE_FOR_nothing
)
5111 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[0], to
);
5112 create_input_operand (&ops
[1], from
, mode
);
5113 return maybe_expand_insn (code
, 2, ops
);
5116 /* Generate code for computing expression EXP,
5117 and storing the value into TARGET.
5119 If the mode is BLKmode then we may return TARGET itself.
5120 It turns out that in BLKmode it doesn't cause a problem.
5121 because C has no operators that could combine two different
5122 assignments into the same BLKmode object with different values
5123 with no sequence point. Will other languages need this to
5126 If CALL_PARAM_P is nonzero, this is a store into a call param on the
5127 stack, and block moves may need to be treated specially.
5129 If NONTEMPORAL is true, try using a nontemporal store instruction. */
5132 store_expr (tree exp
, rtx target
, int call_param_p
, bool nontemporal
)
5135 rtx alt_rtl
= NULL_RTX
;
5136 location_t loc
= curr_insn_location ();
5138 if (VOID_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
5140 /* C++ can generate ?: expressions with a throw expression in one
5141 branch and an rvalue in the other. Here, we resolve attempts to
5142 store the throw expression's nonexistent result. */
5143 gcc_assert (!call_param_p
);
5144 expand_expr (exp
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
5147 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPOUND_EXPR
)
5149 /* Perform first part of compound expression, then assign from second
5151 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
5152 call_param_p
? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
5153 return store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), target
, call_param_p
,
5156 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COND_EXPR
&& GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
)
5158 /* For conditional expression, get safe form of the target. Then
5159 test the condition, doing the appropriate assignment on either
5160 side. This avoids the creation of unnecessary temporaries.
5161 For non-BLKmode, it is more efficient not to do this. */
5163 rtx lab1
= gen_label_rtx (), lab2
= gen_label_rtx ();
5165 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
5167 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), lab1
, -1);
5168 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), target
, call_param_p
,
5170 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (lab2
));
5173 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), target
, call_param_p
,
5180 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (target
))
5181 /* If this is a scalar in a register that is stored in a wider mode
5182 than the declared mode, compute the result into its declared mode
5183 and then convert to the wider mode. Our value is the computed
5186 rtx inner_target
= 0;
5188 /* We can do the conversion inside EXP, which will often result
5189 in some optimizations. Do the conversion in two steps: first
5190 change the signedness, if needed, then the extend. But don't
5191 do this if the type of EXP is a subtype of something else
5192 since then the conversion might involve more than just
5193 converting modes. */
5194 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
5195 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == 0
5196 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (target
))
5197 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
5199 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
5200 != SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
))
5202 /* Some types, e.g. Fortran's logical*4, won't have a signed
5203 version, so use the mode instead. */
5205 = (signed_or_unsigned_type_for
5206 (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
), TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5208 ntype
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode
5209 (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
5210 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
5212 exp
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, ntype
, exp
);
5215 exp
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode
5216 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target
)),
5217 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
)),
5220 inner_target
= SUBREG_REG (target
);
5223 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, inner_target
, VOIDmode
,
5224 call_param_p
? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
5226 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant, use convert_modes to make
5227 sure that we properly convert it. */
5228 if (CONSTANT_P (temp
) && GET_MODE (temp
) == VOIDmode
)
5230 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (target
), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
5231 temp
, SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
5232 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target
)),
5233 GET_MODE (target
), temp
,
5234 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
5237 convert_move (SUBREG_REG (target
), temp
,
5238 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
5242 else if ((TREE_CODE (exp
) == STRING_CST
5243 || (TREE_CODE (exp
) == MEM_REF
5244 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
5245 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
5247 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))))
5248 && !nontemporal
&& !call_param_p
5251 /* Optimize initialization of an array with a STRING_CST. */
5252 HOST_WIDE_INT exp_len
, str_copy_len
;
5254 tree str
= TREE_CODE (exp
) == STRING_CST
5255 ? exp
: TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
5257 exp_len
= int_expr_size (exp
);
5261 if (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
) <= 0)
5264 str_copy_len
= strlen (TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
));
5265 if (str_copy_len
< TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
) - 1)
5268 str_copy_len
= TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
);
5269 if ((STORE_MAX_PIECES
& (STORE_MAX_PIECES
- 1)) == 0
5270 && TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
)[TREE_STRING_LENGTH (str
) - 1] == '\0')
5272 str_copy_len
+= STORE_MAX_PIECES
- 1;
5273 str_copy_len
&= ~(STORE_MAX_PIECES
- 1);
5275 str_copy_len
= MIN (str_copy_len
, exp_len
);
5276 if (!can_store_by_pieces (str_copy_len
, builtin_strncpy_read_str
,
5277 CONST_CAST (char *, TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
)),
5278 MEM_ALIGN (target
), false))
5283 dest_mem
= store_by_pieces (dest_mem
,
5284 str_copy_len
, builtin_strncpy_read_str
,
5286 TREE_STRING_POINTER (str
)),
5287 MEM_ALIGN (target
), false,
5288 exp_len
> str_copy_len
? 1 : 0);
5289 if (exp_len
> str_copy_len
)
5290 clear_storage (adjust_address (dest_mem
, BLKmode
, 0),
5291 GEN_INT (exp_len
- str_copy_len
),
5300 /* If we want to use a nontemporal store, force the value to
5302 tmp_target
= nontemporal
? NULL_RTX
: target
;
5303 temp
= expand_expr_real (exp
, tmp_target
, GET_MODE (target
),
5305 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
),
5309 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant and the mode of the type of EXP is not
5310 the same as that of TARGET, adjust the constant. This is needed, for
5311 example, in case it is a CONST_DOUBLE and we want only a word-sized
5313 if (CONSTANT_P (temp
) && GET_MODE (temp
) == VOIDmode
5314 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != ERROR_MARK
5315 && GET_MODE (target
) != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
5316 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (target
), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
5317 temp
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5319 /* If value was not generated in the target, store it there.
5320 Convert the value to TARGET's type first if necessary and emit the
5321 pending incrementations that have been queued when expanding EXP.
5322 Note that we cannot emit the whole queue blindly because this will
5323 effectively disable the POST_INC optimization later.
5325 If TEMP and TARGET compare equal according to rtx_equal_p, but
5326 one or both of them are volatile memory refs, we have to distinguish
5328 - expand_expr has used TARGET. In this case, we must not generate
5329 another copy. This can be detected by TARGET being equal according
5331 - expand_expr has not used TARGET - that means that the source just
5332 happens to have the same RTX form. Since temp will have been created
5333 by expand_expr, it will compare unequal according to == .
5334 We must generate a copy in this case, to reach the correct number
5335 of volatile memory references. */
5337 if ((! rtx_equal_p (temp
, target
)
5338 || (temp
!= target
&& (side_effects_p (temp
)
5339 || side_effects_p (target
))))
5340 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != ERROR_MARK
5341 /* If store_expr stores a DECL whose DECL_RTL(exp) == TARGET,
5342 but TARGET is not valid memory reference, TEMP will differ
5343 from TARGET although it is really the same location. */
5345 && rtx_equal_p (alt_rtl
, target
)
5346 && !side_effects_p (alt_rtl
)
5347 && !side_effects_p (target
))
5348 /* If there's nothing to copy, don't bother. Don't call
5349 expr_size unless necessary, because some front-ends (C++)
5350 expr_size-hook must not be given objects that are not
5351 supposed to be bit-copied or bit-initialized. */
5352 && expr_size (exp
) != const0_rtx
)
5354 if (GET_MODE (temp
) != GET_MODE (target
) && GET_MODE (temp
) != VOIDmode
)
5356 if (GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
)
5358 /* Handle calls that return BLKmode values in registers. */
5359 if (REG_P (temp
) && TREE_CODE (exp
) == CALL_EXPR
)
5360 copy_blkmode_from_reg (target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
));
5362 store_bit_field (target
,
5363 INTVAL (expr_size (exp
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
,
5364 0, 0, 0, GET_MODE (temp
), temp
);
5367 convert_move (target
, temp
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5370 else if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
&& TREE_CODE (exp
) == STRING_CST
)
5372 /* Handle copying a string constant into an array. The string
5373 constant may be shorter than the array. So copy just the string's
5374 actual length, and clear the rest. First get the size of the data
5375 type of the string, which is actually the size of the target. */
5376 rtx size
= expr_size (exp
);
5378 if (CONST_INT_P (size
)
5379 && INTVAL (size
) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp
))
5380 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, size
,
5382 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
5385 enum machine_mode pointer_mode
5386 = targetm
.addr_space
.pointer_mode (MEM_ADDR_SPACE (target
));
5387 enum machine_mode address_mode
= get_address_mode (target
);
5389 /* Compute the size of the data to copy from the string. */
5391 = size_binop_loc (loc
, MIN_EXPR
,
5392 make_tree (sizetype
, size
),
5393 size_int (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp
)));
5395 = expand_expr (copy_size
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
,
5397 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM
: EXPAND_NORMAL
));
5400 /* Copy that much. */
5401 copy_size_rtx
= convert_to_mode (pointer_mode
, copy_size_rtx
,
5402 TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
));
5403 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, copy_size_rtx
,
5405 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
5407 /* Figure out how much is left in TARGET that we have to clear.
5408 Do all calculations in pointer_mode. */
5409 if (CONST_INT_P (copy_size_rtx
))
5411 size
= plus_constant (address_mode
, size
,
5412 -INTVAL (copy_size_rtx
));
5413 target
= adjust_address (target
, BLKmode
,
5414 INTVAL (copy_size_rtx
));
5418 size
= expand_binop (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
), sub_optab
, size
,
5419 copy_size_rtx
, NULL_RTX
, 0,
5422 if (GET_MODE (copy_size_rtx
) != address_mode
)
5423 copy_size_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
,
5425 TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
));
5427 target
= offset_address (target
, copy_size_rtx
,
5428 highest_pow2_factor (copy_size
));
5429 label
= gen_label_rtx ();
5430 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (size
, const0_rtx
, LT
, NULL_RTX
,
5431 GET_MODE (size
), 0, label
);
5434 if (size
!= const0_rtx
)
5435 clear_storage (target
, size
, BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5441 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
5442 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
5443 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == PARALLEL
)
5445 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == PARALLEL
)
5446 emit_group_move (target
, temp
);
5448 emit_group_load (target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
5449 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5451 else if (GET_CODE (temp
) == PARALLEL
)
5452 emit_group_store (target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
5453 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5454 else if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
)
5455 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, expr_size (exp
),
5457 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
5458 /* If we emit a nontemporal store, there is nothing else to do. */
5459 else if (nontemporal
&& emit_storent_insn (target
, temp
))
5463 temp
= force_operand (temp
, target
);
5465 emit_move_insn (target
, temp
);
5472 /* Return true if field F of structure TYPE is a flexible array. */
5475 flexible_array_member_p (const_tree f
, const_tree type
)
5480 return (DECL_CHAIN (f
) == NULL
5481 && TREE_CODE (tf
) == ARRAY_TYPE
5483 && TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf
))
5484 && integer_zerop (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf
)))
5485 && !TYPE_MAX_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf
))
5486 && int_size_in_bytes (type
) >= 0);
5489 /* If FOR_CTOR_P, return the number of top-level elements that a constructor
5490 must have in order for it to completely initialize a value of type TYPE.
5491 Return -1 if the number isn't known.
5493 If !FOR_CTOR_P, return an estimate of the number of scalars in TYPE. */
5495 static HOST_WIDE_INT
5496 count_type_elements (const_tree type
, bool for_ctor_p
)
5498 switch (TREE_CODE (type
))
5504 nelts
= array_type_nelts (type
);
5505 if (nelts
&& tree_fits_uhwi_p (nelts
))
5507 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n
;
5509 n
= tree_to_uhwi (nelts
) + 1;
5510 if (n
== 0 || for_ctor_p
)
5513 return n
* count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (type
), false);
5515 return for_ctor_p
? -1 : 1;
5520 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n
;
5524 for (f
= TYPE_FIELDS (type
); f
; f
= DECL_CHAIN (f
))
5525 if (TREE_CODE (f
) == FIELD_DECL
)
5528 n
+= count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (f
), false);
5529 else if (!flexible_array_member_p (f
, type
))
5530 /* Don't count flexible arrays, which are not supposed
5531 to be initialized. */
5539 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE
:
5544 gcc_assert (!for_ctor_p
);
5545 /* Estimate the number of scalars in each field and pick the
5546 maximum. Other estimates would do instead; the idea is simply
5547 to make sure that the estimate is not sensitive to the ordering
5550 for (f
= TYPE_FIELDS (type
); f
; f
= DECL_CHAIN (f
))
5551 if (TREE_CODE (f
) == FIELD_DECL
)
5553 m
= count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (f
), false);
5554 /* If the field doesn't span the whole union, add an extra
5555 scalar for the rest. */
5556 if (simple_cst_equal (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (f
)),
5557 TYPE_SIZE (type
)) != 1)
5569 return TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type
);
5573 case FIXED_POINT_TYPE
:
5578 case REFERENCE_TYPE
:
5594 /* Helper for categorize_ctor_elements. Identical interface. */
5597 categorize_ctor_elements_1 (const_tree ctor
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_nz_elts
,
5598 HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_init_elts
, bool *p_complete
)
5600 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
5601 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts
, init_elts
, num_fields
;
5602 tree value
, purpose
, elt_type
;
5604 /* Whether CTOR is a valid constant initializer, in accordance with what
5605 initializer_constant_valid_p does. If inferred from the constructor
5606 elements, true until proven otherwise. */
5607 bool const_from_elts_p
= constructor_static_from_elts_p (ctor
);
5608 bool const_p
= const_from_elts_p
? true : TREE_STATIC (ctor
);
5613 elt_type
= NULL_TREE
;
5615 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor
), idx
, purpose
, value
)
5617 HOST_WIDE_INT mult
= 1;
5619 if (purpose
&& TREE_CODE (purpose
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
5621 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (purpose
, 0);
5622 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (purpose
, 1);
5624 if (tree_fits_uhwi_p (lo_index
) && tree_fits_uhwi_p (hi_index
))
5625 mult
= (tree_to_uhwi (hi_index
)
5626 - tree_to_uhwi (lo_index
) + 1);
5629 elt_type
= TREE_TYPE (value
);
5631 switch (TREE_CODE (value
))
5635 HOST_WIDE_INT nz
= 0, ic
= 0;
5637 bool const_elt_p
= categorize_ctor_elements_1 (value
, &nz
, &ic
,
5640 nz_elts
+= mult
* nz
;
5641 init_elts
+= mult
* ic
;
5643 if (const_from_elts_p
&& const_p
)
5644 const_p
= const_elt_p
;
5651 if (!initializer_zerop (value
))
5657 nz_elts
+= mult
* TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value
);
5658 init_elts
+= mult
* TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value
);
5662 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_REALPART (value
)))
5664 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_IMAGPART (value
)))
5672 for (i
= 0; i
< VECTOR_CST_NELTS (value
); ++i
)
5674 tree v
= VECTOR_CST_ELT (value
, i
);
5675 if (!initializer_zerop (v
))
5684 HOST_WIDE_INT tc
= count_type_elements (elt_type
, false);
5685 nz_elts
+= mult
* tc
;
5686 init_elts
+= mult
* tc
;
5688 if (const_from_elts_p
&& const_p
)
5689 const_p
= initializer_constant_valid_p (value
, elt_type
)
5696 if (*p_complete
&& !complete_ctor_at_level_p (TREE_TYPE (ctor
),
5697 num_fields
, elt_type
))
5698 *p_complete
= false;
5700 *p_nz_elts
+= nz_elts
;
5701 *p_init_elts
+= init_elts
;
5706 /* Examine CTOR to discover:
5707 * how many scalar fields are set to nonzero values,
5708 and place it in *P_NZ_ELTS;
5709 * how many scalar fields in total are in CTOR,
5710 and place it in *P_ELT_COUNT.
5711 * whether the constructor is complete -- in the sense that every
5712 meaningful byte is explicitly given a value --
5713 and place it in *P_COMPLETE.
5715 Return whether or not CTOR is a valid static constant initializer, the same
5716 as "initializer_constant_valid_p (CTOR, TREE_TYPE (CTOR)) != 0". */
5719 categorize_ctor_elements (const_tree ctor
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_nz_elts
,
5720 HOST_WIDE_INT
*p_init_elts
, bool *p_complete
)
5726 return categorize_ctor_elements_1 (ctor
, p_nz_elts
, p_init_elts
, p_complete
);
5729 /* TYPE is initialized by a constructor with NUM_ELTS elements, the last
5730 of which had type LAST_TYPE. Each element was itself a complete
5731 initializer, in the sense that every meaningful byte was explicitly
5732 given a value. Return true if the same is true for the constructor
5736 complete_ctor_at_level_p (const_tree type
, HOST_WIDE_INT num_elts
,
5737 const_tree last_type
)
5739 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
5740 || TREE_CODE (type
) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE
)
5745 gcc_assert (num_elts
== 1 && last_type
);
5747 /* ??? We could look at each element of the union, and find the
5748 largest element. Which would avoid comparing the size of the
5749 initialized element against any tail padding in the union.
5750 Doesn't seem worth the effort... */
5751 return simple_cst_equal (TYPE_SIZE (type
), TYPE_SIZE (last_type
)) == 1;
5754 return count_type_elements (type
, true) == num_elts
;
5757 /* Return 1 if EXP contains mostly (3/4) zeros. */
5760 mostly_zeros_p (const_tree exp
)
5762 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
5764 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts
, init_elts
;
5767 categorize_ctor_elements (exp
, &nz_elts
, &init_elts
, &complete_p
);
5768 return !complete_p
|| nz_elts
< init_elts
/ 4;
5771 return initializer_zerop (exp
);
5774 /* Return 1 if EXP contains all zeros. */
5777 all_zeros_p (const_tree exp
)
5779 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
5781 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts
, init_elts
;
5784 categorize_ctor_elements (exp
, &nz_elts
, &init_elts
, &complete_p
);
5785 return nz_elts
== 0;
5788 return initializer_zerop (exp
);
5791 /* Helper function for store_constructor.
5792 TARGET, BITSIZE, BITPOS, MODE, EXP are as for store_field.
5793 CLEARED is as for store_constructor.
5794 ALIAS_SET is the alias set to use for any stores.
5796 This provides a recursive shortcut back to store_constructor when it isn't
5797 necessary to go through store_field. This is so that we can pass through
5798 the cleared field to let store_constructor know that we may not have to
5799 clear a substructure if the outer structure has already been cleared. */
5802 store_constructor_field (rtx target
, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
,
5803 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
, enum machine_mode mode
,
5804 tree exp
, int cleared
, alias_set_type alias_set
)
5806 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
5807 /* We can only call store_constructor recursively if the size and
5808 bit position are on a byte boundary. */
5809 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0
5810 && (bitsize
> 0 && bitsize
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0)
5811 /* If we have a nonzero bitpos for a register target, then we just
5812 let store_field do the bitfield handling. This is unlikely to
5813 generate unnecessary clear instructions anyways. */
5814 && (bitpos
== 0 || MEM_P (target
)))
5818 = adjust_address (target
,
5819 GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
5821 % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (GET_MODE (target
)))
5822 ? BLKmode
: VOIDmode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
5825 /* Update the alias set, if required. */
5826 if (MEM_P (target
) && ! MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
)
5827 && MEM_ALIAS_SET (target
) != 0)
5829 target
= copy_rtx (target
);
5830 set_mem_alias_set (target
, alias_set
);
5833 store_constructor (exp
, target
, cleared
, bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
5836 store_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, 0, 0, mode
, exp
, alias_set
, false);
5840 /* Returns the number of FIELD_DECLs in TYPE. */
5843 fields_length (const_tree type
)
5845 tree t
= TYPE_FIELDS (type
);
5848 for (; t
; t
= DECL_CHAIN (t
))
5849 if (TREE_CODE (t
) == FIELD_DECL
)
5856 /* Store the value of constructor EXP into the rtx TARGET.
5857 TARGET is either a REG or a MEM; we know it cannot conflict, since
5858 safe_from_p has been called.
5859 CLEARED is true if TARGET is known to have been zero'd.
5860 SIZE is the number of bytes of TARGET we are allowed to modify: this
5861 may not be the same as the size of EXP if we are assigning to a field
5862 which has been packed to exclude padding bits. */
5865 store_constructor (tree exp
, rtx target
, int cleared
, HOST_WIDE_INT size
)
5867 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
5868 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
5869 HOST_WIDE_INT exp_size
= int_size_in_bytes (type
);
5872 switch (TREE_CODE (type
))
5876 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE
:
5878 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
5881 /* If size is zero or the target is already cleared, do nothing. */
5882 if (size
== 0 || cleared
)
5884 /* We either clear the aggregate or indicate the value is dead. */
5885 else if ((TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
5886 || TREE_CODE (type
) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE
)
5887 && ! CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
))
5888 /* If the constructor is empty, clear the union. */
5890 clear_storage (target
, expr_size (exp
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5894 /* If we are building a static constructor into a register,
5895 set the initial value as zero so we can fold the value into
5896 a constant. But if more than one register is involved,
5897 this probably loses. */
5898 else if (REG_P (target
) && TREE_STATIC (exp
)
5899 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target
)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
)
5901 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
5905 /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure or
5906 if we are initializing the structure to mostly zeros, clear
5907 the whole structure first. Don't do this if TARGET is a
5908 register whose mode size isn't equal to SIZE since
5909 clear_storage can't handle this case. */
5911 && (((int)vec_safe_length (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
))
5912 != fields_length (type
))
5913 || mostly_zeros_p (exp
))
5915 || ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target
))
5918 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
5922 if (REG_P (target
) && !cleared
)
5923 emit_clobber (target
);
5925 /* Store each element of the constructor into the
5926 corresponding field of TARGET. */
5927 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, field
, value
)
5929 enum machine_mode mode
;
5930 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
;
5931 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
= 0;
5933 rtx to_rtx
= target
;
5935 /* Just ignore missing fields. We cleared the whole
5936 structure, above, if any fields are missing. */
5940 if (cleared
&& initializer_zerop (value
))
5943 if (tree_fits_uhwi_p (DECL_SIZE (field
)))
5944 bitsize
= tree_to_uhwi (DECL_SIZE (field
));
5948 mode
= DECL_MODE (field
);
5949 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
))
5952 offset
= DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field
);
5953 if (tree_fits_shwi_p (offset
)
5954 && tree_fits_shwi_p (bit_position (field
)))
5956 bitpos
= int_bit_position (field
);
5960 bitpos
= tree_to_shwi (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field
));
5964 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
5968 = SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (offset
,
5969 make_tree (TREE_TYPE (exp
),
5972 offset_rtx
= expand_normal (offset
);
5973 gcc_assert (MEM_P (to_rtx
));
5975 address_mode
= get_address_mode (to_rtx
);
5976 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != address_mode
)
5977 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
5979 to_rtx
= offset_address (to_rtx
, offset_rtx
,
5980 highest_pow2_factor (offset
));
5983 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
5984 /* If this initializes a field that is smaller than a
5985 word, at the start of a word, try to widen it to a full
5986 word. This special case allows us to output C++ member
5987 function initializations in a form that the optimizers
5990 && bitsize
< BITS_PER_WORD
5991 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0
5992 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
5993 && TREE_CODE (value
) == INTEGER_CST
5995 && bitpos
+ BITS_PER_WORD
<= exp_size
* BITS_PER_UNIT
)
5997 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (value
);
5999 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
6001 type
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode
6002 (word_mode
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
));
6003 value
= fold_convert (type
, value
);
6006 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
6008 = fold_build2 (LSHIFT_EXPR
, type
, value
,
6009 build_int_cst (type
,
6010 BITS_PER_WORD
- bitsize
));
6011 bitsize
= BITS_PER_WORD
;
6016 if (MEM_P (to_rtx
) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx
)
6017 && DECL_NONADDRESSABLE_P (field
))
6019 to_rtx
= copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
6020 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
6023 store_constructor_field (to_rtx
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
,
6025 get_alias_set (TREE_TYPE (field
)));
6032 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT i
;
6035 tree elttype
= TREE_TYPE (type
);
6037 HOST_WIDE_INT minelt
= 0;
6038 HOST_WIDE_INT maxelt
= 0;
6040 domain
= TYPE_DOMAIN (type
);
6041 const_bounds_p
= (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
)
6042 && TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
)
6043 && tree_fits_shwi_p (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
))
6044 && tree_fits_shwi_p (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
)));
6046 /* If we have constant bounds for the range of the type, get them. */
6049 minelt
= tree_to_shwi (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
));
6050 maxelt
= tree_to_shwi (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
));
6053 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the array, clear
6054 the whole array first. Similarly if this is static
6055 constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
6058 else if (REG_P (target
) && TREE_STATIC (exp
))
6062 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
6064 HOST_WIDE_INT count
= 0, zero_count
= 0;
6065 need_to_clear
= ! const_bounds_p
;
6067 /* This loop is a more accurate version of the loop in
6068 mostly_zeros_p (it handles RANGE_EXPR in an index). It
6069 is also needed to check for missing elements. */
6070 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, index
, value
)
6072 HOST_WIDE_INT this_node_count
;
6077 if (index
!= NULL_TREE
&& TREE_CODE (index
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
6079 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 0);
6080 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 1);
6082 if (! tree_fits_uhwi_p (lo_index
)
6083 || ! tree_fits_uhwi_p (hi_index
))
6089 this_node_count
= (tree_to_uhwi (hi_index
)
6090 - tree_to_uhwi (lo_index
) + 1);
6093 this_node_count
= 1;
6095 count
+= this_node_count
;
6096 if (mostly_zeros_p (value
))
6097 zero_count
+= this_node_count
;
6100 /* Clear the entire array first if there are any missing
6101 elements, or if the incidence of zero elements is >=
6104 && (count
< maxelt
- minelt
+ 1
6105 || 4 * zero_count
>= 3 * count
))
6109 if (need_to_clear
&& size
> 0)
6112 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
6114 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
6118 if (!cleared
&& REG_P (target
))
6119 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
6120 emit_clobber (target
);
6122 /* Store each element of the constructor into the
6123 corresponding element of TARGET, determined by counting the
6125 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), i
, index
, value
)
6127 enum machine_mode mode
;
6128 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
;
6129 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
;
6130 rtx xtarget
= target
;
6132 if (cleared
&& initializer_zerop (value
))
6135 mode
= TYPE_MODE (elttype
);
6136 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6137 bitsize
= (tree_fits_uhwi_p (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
))
6138 ? tree_to_uhwi (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
))
6141 bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
);
6143 if (index
!= NULL_TREE
&& TREE_CODE (index
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
6145 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 0);
6146 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 1);
6147 rtx index_r
, pos_rtx
;
6148 HOST_WIDE_INT lo
, hi
, count
;
6151 /* If the range is constant and "small", unroll the loop. */
6153 && tree_fits_shwi_p (lo_index
)
6154 && tree_fits_shwi_p (hi_index
)
6155 && (lo
= tree_to_shwi (lo_index
),
6156 hi
= tree_to_shwi (hi_index
),
6157 count
= hi
- lo
+ 1,
6160 || (tree_fits_uhwi_p (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
))
6161 && (tree_to_uhwi (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)) * count
6164 lo
-= minelt
; hi
-= minelt
;
6165 for (; lo
<= hi
; lo
++)
6167 bitpos
= lo
* tree_to_shwi (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
));
6170 && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
)
6171 && TREE_CODE (type
) == ARRAY_TYPE
6172 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type
))
6174 target
= copy_rtx (target
);
6175 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
) = 1;
6178 store_constructor_field
6179 (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, value
, cleared
,
6180 get_alias_set (elttype
));
6185 rtx loop_start
= gen_label_rtx ();
6186 rtx loop_end
= gen_label_rtx ();
6189 expand_normal (hi_index
);
6191 index
= build_decl (EXPR_LOCATION (exp
),
6192 VAR_DECL
, NULL_TREE
, domain
);
6193 index_r
= gen_reg_rtx (promote_decl_mode (index
, NULL
));
6194 SET_DECL_RTL (index
, index_r
);
6195 store_expr (lo_index
, index_r
, 0, false);
6197 /* Build the head of the loop. */
6198 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
6199 emit_label (loop_start
);
6201 /* Assign value to element index. */
6203 fold_convert (ssizetype
,
6204 fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
,
6207 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
)));
6210 size_binop (MULT_EXPR
, position
,
6211 fold_convert (ssizetype
,
6212 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype
)));
6214 pos_rtx
= expand_normal (position
);
6215 xtarget
= offset_address (target
, pos_rtx
,
6216 highest_pow2_factor (position
));
6217 xtarget
= adjust_address (xtarget
, mode
, 0);
6218 if (TREE_CODE (value
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
6219 store_constructor (value
, xtarget
, cleared
,
6220 bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
6222 store_expr (value
, xtarget
, 0, false);
6224 /* Generate a conditional jump to exit the loop. */
6225 exit_cond
= build2 (LT_EXPR
, integer_type_node
,
6227 jumpif (exit_cond
, loop_end
, -1);
6229 /* Update the loop counter, and jump to the head of
6231 expand_assignment (index
,
6232 build2 (PLUS_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (index
),
6233 index
, integer_one_node
),
6236 emit_jump (loop_start
);
6238 /* Build the end of the loop. */
6239 emit_label (loop_end
);
6242 else if ((index
!= 0 && ! tree_fits_shwi_p (index
))
6243 || ! tree_fits_uhwi_p (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)))
6248 index
= ssize_int (1);
6251 index
= fold_convert (ssizetype
,
6252 fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
,
6255 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
)));
6258 size_binop (MULT_EXPR
, index
,
6259 fold_convert (ssizetype
,
6260 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype
)));
6261 xtarget
= offset_address (target
,
6262 expand_normal (position
),
6263 highest_pow2_factor (position
));
6264 xtarget
= adjust_address (xtarget
, mode
, 0);
6265 store_expr (value
, xtarget
, 0, false);
6270 bitpos
= ((tree_to_shwi (index
) - minelt
)
6271 * tree_to_uhwi (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)));
6273 bitpos
= (i
* tree_to_uhwi (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)));
6275 if (MEM_P (target
) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
)
6276 && TREE_CODE (type
) == ARRAY_TYPE
6277 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type
))
6279 target
= copy_rtx (target
);
6280 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target
) = 1;
6282 store_constructor_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, value
,
6283 cleared
, get_alias_set (elttype
));
6291 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
6292 constructor_elt
*ce
;
6295 int icode
= CODE_FOR_nothing
;
6296 tree elttype
= TREE_TYPE (type
);
6297 int elt_size
= tree_to_uhwi (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
));
6298 enum machine_mode eltmode
= TYPE_MODE (elttype
);
6299 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
;
6300 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
;
6301 rtvec vector
= NULL
;
6303 alias_set_type alias
;
6305 gcc_assert (eltmode
!= BLKmode
);
6307 n_elts
= TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type
);
6308 if (REG_P (target
) && VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (target
)))
6310 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (target
);
6312 icode
= (int) optab_handler (vec_init_optab
, mode
);
6313 /* Don't use vec_init<mode> if some elements have VECTOR_TYPE. */
6314 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
6318 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, value
)
6319 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value
)) == VECTOR_TYPE
)
6321 icode
= CODE_FOR_nothing
;
6325 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
6329 vector
= rtvec_alloc (n_elts
);
6330 for (i
= 0; i
< n_elts
; i
++)
6331 RTVEC_ELT (vector
, i
) = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode
));
6335 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the vector,
6336 clear the whole array first. Similarly if this is static
6337 constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
6340 else if (REG_P (target
) && TREE_STATIC (exp
))
6344 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT count
= 0, zero_count
= 0;
6347 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, value
)
6349 int n_elts_here
= tree_to_uhwi
6350 (int_const_binop (TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
,
6351 TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value
)),
6352 TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)));
6354 count
+= n_elts_here
;
6355 if (mostly_zeros_p (value
))
6356 zero_count
+= n_elts_here
;
6359 /* Clear the entire vector first if there are any missing elements,
6360 or if the incidence of zero elements is >= 75%. */
6361 need_to_clear
= (count
< n_elts
|| 4 * zero_count
>= 3 * count
);
6364 if (need_to_clear
&& size
> 0 && !vector
)
6367 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
6369 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
6373 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
6374 if (!cleared
&& !vector
&& REG_P (target
))
6375 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
6378 alias
= MEM_ALIAS_SET (target
);
6380 alias
= get_alias_set (elttype
);
6382 /* Store each element of the constructor into the corresponding
6383 element of TARGET, determined by counting the elements. */
6384 for (idx
= 0, i
= 0;
6385 vec_safe_iterate (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, &ce
);
6386 idx
++, i
+= bitsize
/ elt_size
)
6388 HOST_WIDE_INT eltpos
;
6389 tree value
= ce
->value
;
6391 bitsize
= tree_to_uhwi (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value
)));
6392 if (cleared
&& initializer_zerop (value
))
6396 eltpos
= tree_to_uhwi (ce
->index
);
6402 /* vec_init<mode> should not be used if there are VECTOR_TYPE
6404 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value
)) != VECTOR_TYPE
);
6405 RTVEC_ELT (vector
, eltpos
)
6406 = expand_normal (value
);
6410 enum machine_mode value_mode
=
6411 TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value
)) == VECTOR_TYPE
6412 ? TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (value
))
6414 bitpos
= eltpos
* elt_size
;
6415 store_constructor_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, value_mode
,
6416 value
, cleared
, alias
);
6421 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode
)
6423 gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (target
), vector
)));
6432 /* Store the value of EXP (an expression tree)
6433 into a subfield of TARGET which has mode MODE and occupies
6434 BITSIZE bits, starting BITPOS bits from the start of TARGET.
6435 If MODE is VOIDmode, it means that we are storing into a bit-field.
6437 BITREGION_START is bitpos of the first bitfield in this region.
6438 BITREGION_END is the bitpos of the ending bitfield in this region.
6439 These two fields are 0, if the C++ memory model does not apply,
6440 or we are not interested in keeping track of bitfield regions.
6442 Always return const0_rtx unless we have something particular to
6445 ALIAS_SET is the alias set for the destination. This value will
6446 (in general) be different from that for TARGET, since TARGET is a
6447 reference to the containing structure.
6449 If NONTEMPORAL is true, try generating a nontemporal store. */
6452 store_field (rtx target
, HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos
,
6453 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_start
,
6454 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitregion_end
,
6455 enum machine_mode mode
, tree exp
,
6456 alias_set_type alias_set
, bool nontemporal
)
6458 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
)
6461 /* If we have nothing to store, do nothing unless the expression has
6464 return expand_expr (exp
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
6466 if (GET_CODE (target
) == CONCAT
)
6468 /* We're storing into a struct containing a single __complex. */
6470 gcc_assert (!bitpos
);
6471 return store_expr (exp
, target
, 0, nontemporal
);
6474 /* If the structure is in a register or if the component
6475 is a bit field, we cannot use addressing to access it.
6476 Use bit-field techniques or SUBREG to store in it. */
6478 if (mode
== VOIDmode
6479 || (mode
!= BLKmode
&& ! direct_store
[(int) mode
]
6480 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
6481 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
)
6483 || GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
6484 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to store as an ordinary memref,
6485 store it as a bit field. */
6487 && ((((MEM_ALIGN (target
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
6488 || bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
6489 && SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, MEM_ALIGN (target
)))
6490 || (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
!= 0)))
6491 || (bitsize
>= 0 && mode
!= BLKmode
6492 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) > bitsize
)
6493 /* If the RHS and field are a constant size and the size of the
6494 RHS isn't the same size as the bitfield, we must use bitfield
6497 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) == INTEGER_CST
6498 && compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), bitsize
) != 0)
6499 /* If we are expanding a MEM_REF of a non-BLKmode non-addressable
6500 decl we must use bitfield operations. */
6502 && TREE_CODE (exp
) == MEM_REF
6503 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
6504 && DECL_P (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
6505 && !TREE_ADDRESSABLE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0),0 ))
6506 && DECL_MODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)) != BLKmode
))
6511 /* If EXP is a NOP_EXPR of precision less than its mode, then that
6512 implies a mask operation. If the precision is the same size as
6513 the field we're storing into, that mask is redundant. This is
6514 particularly common with bit field assignments generated by the
6516 nop_def
= get_def_for_expr (exp
, NOP_EXPR
);
6519 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
6520 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
6521 && TYPE_PRECISION (type
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (type
))
6522 && bitsize
== TYPE_PRECISION (type
))
6524 tree op
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (nop_def
);
6525 type
= TREE_TYPE (op
);
6526 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
) && TYPE_PRECISION (type
) >= bitsize
)
6531 temp
= expand_normal (exp
);
6533 /* If BITSIZE is narrower than the size of the type of EXP
6534 we will be narrowing TEMP. Normally, what's wanted are the
6535 low-order bits. However, if EXP's type is a record and this is
6536 big-endian machine, we want the upper BITSIZE bits. */
6537 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp
)) == MODE_INT
6538 && bitsize
< (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp
))
6539 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == RECORD_TYPE
)
6540 temp
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (temp
), temp
,
6541 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp
)) - bitsize
,
6544 /* Unless MODE is VOIDmode or BLKmode, convert TEMP to MODE. */
6545 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
6546 && mode
!= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
6547 temp
= convert_modes (mode
, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), temp
, 1);
6549 /* If the modes of TEMP and TARGET are both BLKmode, both
6550 must be in memory and BITPOS must be aligned on a byte
6551 boundary. If so, we simply do a block copy. Likewise
6552 for a BLKmode-like TARGET. */
6553 if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
6554 && (GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
6556 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (target
)) == MODE_INT
6557 && (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0
6558 && (bitsize
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0)))
6560 gcc_assert (MEM_P (target
) && MEM_P (temp
)
6561 && (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0);
6563 target
= adjust_address (target
, VOIDmode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
6564 emit_block_move (target
, temp
,
6565 GEN_INT ((bitsize
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1)
6572 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
6573 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
6574 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == PARALLEL
)
6576 HOST_WIDE_INT size
= int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6578 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6579 mode
= smallest_mode_for_size (size
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, MODE_INT
);
6580 temp_target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
6581 emit_group_store (temp_target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
), size
);
6584 else if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6586 /* Handle calls that return BLKmode values in registers. */
6587 if (REG_P (temp
) && TREE_CODE (exp
) == CALL_EXPR
)
6589 rtx temp_target
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (temp
));
6590 copy_blkmode_from_reg (temp_target
, temp
, TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6595 HOST_WIDE_INT size
= int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6597 mode
= smallest_mode_for_size (size
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, MODE_INT
);
6598 temp_target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
6600 = extract_bit_field (temp
, size
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, 0, 1,
6601 temp_target
, mode
, mode
);
6606 /* Store the value in the bitfield. */
6607 store_bit_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
6608 bitregion_start
, bitregion_end
,
6615 /* Now build a reference to just the desired component. */
6616 rtx to_rtx
= adjust_address (target
, mode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
6618 if (to_rtx
== target
)
6619 to_rtx
= copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
6621 if (!MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx
) && MEM_ALIAS_SET (to_rtx
) != 0)
6622 set_mem_alias_set (to_rtx
, alias_set
);
6624 return store_expr (exp
, to_rtx
, 0, nontemporal
);
6628 /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, a BIT_FIELD_REF,
6629 an ARRAY_REF, or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF, look for nested operations of these
6630 codes and find the ultimate containing object, which we return.
6632 We set *PBITSIZE to the size in bits that we want, *PBITPOS to the
6633 bit position, and *PUNSIGNEDP to the signedness of the field.
6634 If the position of the field is variable, we store a tree
6635 giving the variable offset (in units) in *POFFSET.
6636 This offset is in addition to the bit position.
6637 If the position is not variable, we store 0 in *POFFSET.
6639 If any of the extraction expressions is volatile,
6640 we store 1 in *PVOLATILEP. Otherwise we don't change that.
6642 If the field is a non-BLKmode bit-field, *PMODE is set to VOIDmode.
6643 Otherwise, it is a mode that can be used to access the field.
6645 If the field describes a variable-sized object, *PMODE is set to
6646 BLKmode and *PBITSIZE is set to -1. An access cannot be made in
6647 this case, but the address of the object can be found. */
6650 get_inner_reference (tree exp
, HOST_WIDE_INT
*pbitsize
,
6651 HOST_WIDE_INT
*pbitpos
, tree
*poffset
,
6652 enum machine_mode
*pmode
, int *punsignedp
,
6656 enum machine_mode mode
= VOIDmode
;
6657 bool blkmode_bitfield
= false;
6658 tree offset
= size_zero_node
;
6659 double_int bit_offset
= double_int_zero
;
6661 /* First get the mode, signedness, and size. We do this from just the
6662 outermost expression. */
6664 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPONENT_REF
)
6666 tree field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6667 size_tree
= DECL_SIZE (field
);
6668 if (flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0
6669 && TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
)
6670 && DECL_BIT_FIELD_TYPE (field
)
6671 && DECL_MODE (field
) != BLKmode
)
6672 /* Volatile bitfields should be accessed in the mode of the
6673 field's type, not the mode computed based on the bit
6675 mode
= TYPE_MODE (DECL_BIT_FIELD_TYPE (field
));
6676 else if (!DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
))
6677 mode
= DECL_MODE (field
);
6678 else if (DECL_MODE (field
) == BLKmode
)
6679 blkmode_bitfield
= true;
6681 *punsignedp
= DECL_UNSIGNED (field
);
6683 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == BIT_FIELD_REF
)
6685 size_tree
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6686 *punsignedp
= (! INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
6687 || TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
6689 /* For vector types, with the correct size of access, use the mode of
6691 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) == VECTOR_TYPE
6692 && TREE_TYPE (exp
) == TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
6693 && tree_int_cst_equal (size_tree
, TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))))
6694 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6698 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6699 *punsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6701 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6702 size_tree
= TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
6704 *pbitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
);
6709 if (! tree_fits_uhwi_p (size_tree
))
6710 mode
= BLKmode
, *pbitsize
= -1;
6712 *pbitsize
= tree_to_uhwi (size_tree
);
6715 /* Compute cumulative bit-offset for nested component-refs and array-refs,
6716 and find the ultimate containing object. */
6719 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
6722 bit_offset
+= tree_to_double_int (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2));
6727 tree field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6728 tree this_offset
= component_ref_field_offset (exp
);
6730 /* If this field hasn't been filled in yet, don't go past it.
6731 This should only happen when folding expressions made during
6732 type construction. */
6733 if (this_offset
== 0)
6736 offset
= size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
, offset
, this_offset
);
6737 bit_offset
+= tree_to_double_int (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field
));
6739 /* ??? Right now we don't do anything with DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN. */
6744 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF
:
6746 tree index
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6747 tree low_bound
= array_ref_low_bound (exp
);
6748 tree unit_size
= array_ref_element_size (exp
);
6750 /* We assume all arrays have sizes that are a multiple of a byte.
6751 First subtract the lower bound, if any, in the type of the
6752 index, then convert to sizetype and multiply by the size of
6753 the array element. */
6754 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound
))
6755 index
= fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (index
),
6758 offset
= size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
, offset
,
6759 size_binop (MULT_EXPR
,
6760 fold_convert (sizetype
, index
),
6769 bit_offset
+= double_int::from_uhwi (*pbitsize
);
6772 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
:
6776 /* Hand back the decl for MEM[&decl, off]. */
6777 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
)
6779 tree off
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6780 if (!integer_zerop (off
))
6782 double_int boff
, coff
= mem_ref_offset (exp
);
6783 boff
= coff
.lshift (BITS_PER_UNIT
== 8
6784 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
));
6787 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
6795 /* If any reference in the chain is volatile, the effect is volatile. */
6796 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
))
6799 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
6803 /* If OFFSET is constant, see if we can return the whole thing as a
6804 constant bit position. Make sure to handle overflow during
6806 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) == INTEGER_CST
)
6808 double_int tem
= tree_to_double_int (offset
);
6809 tem
= tem
.sext (TYPE_PRECISION (sizetype
));
6810 tem
= tem
.lshift (BITS_PER_UNIT
== 8 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
));
6812 if (tem
.fits_shwi ())
6814 *pbitpos
= tem
.to_shwi ();
6815 *poffset
= offset
= NULL_TREE
;
6819 /* Otherwise, split it up. */
6822 /* Avoid returning a negative bitpos as this may wreak havoc later. */
6823 if (bit_offset
.is_negative ())
6826 = double_int::mask (BITS_PER_UNIT
== 8
6827 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
));
6828 double_int tem
= bit_offset
.and_not (mask
);
6829 /* TEM is the bitpos rounded to BITS_PER_UNIT towards -Inf.
6830 Subtract it to BIT_OFFSET and add it (scaled) to OFFSET. */
6832 tem
= tem
.arshift (BITS_PER_UNIT
== 8
6833 ? 3 : exact_log2 (BITS_PER_UNIT
),
6834 HOST_BITS_PER_DOUBLE_INT
);
6835 offset
= size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
, offset
,
6836 double_int_to_tree (sizetype
, tem
));
6839 *pbitpos
= bit_offset
.to_shwi ();
6843 /* We can use BLKmode for a byte-aligned BLKmode bitfield. */
6844 if (mode
== VOIDmode
6846 && (*pbitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0
6847 && (*pbitsize
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0)
6855 /* Return a tree of sizetype representing the size, in bytes, of the element
6856 of EXP, an ARRAY_REF or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF. */
6859 array_ref_element_size (tree exp
)
6861 tree aligned_size
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 3);
6862 tree elmt_type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
6863 location_t loc
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
6865 /* If a size was specified in the ARRAY_REF, it's the size measured
6866 in alignment units of the element type. So multiply by that value. */
6869 /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to
6870 sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */
6871 if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_size
) != sizetype
)
6872 aligned_size
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
, aligned_size
);
6873 return size_binop_loc (loc
, MULT_EXPR
, aligned_size
,
6874 size_int (TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (elmt_type
)));
6877 /* Otherwise, take the size from that of the element type. Substitute
6878 any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */
6880 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elmt_type
), exp
);
6883 /* Return a tree representing the lower bound of the array mentioned in
6884 EXP, an ARRAY_REF or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF. */
6887 array_ref_low_bound (tree exp
)
6889 tree domain_type
= TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
6891 /* If a lower bound is specified in EXP, use it. */
6892 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2))
6893 return TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
6895 /* Otherwise, if there is a domain type and it has a lower bound, use it,
6896 substituting for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */
6897 if (domain_type
&& TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type
))
6898 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type
), exp
);
6900 /* Otherwise, return a zero of the appropriate type. */
6901 return build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)), 0);
6904 /* Returns true if REF is an array reference to an array at the end of
6905 a structure. If this is the case, the array may be allocated larger
6906 than its upper bound implies. */
6909 array_at_struct_end_p (tree ref
)
6911 if (TREE_CODE (ref
) != ARRAY_REF
6912 && TREE_CODE (ref
) != ARRAY_RANGE_REF
)
6915 while (handled_component_p (ref
))
6917 /* If the reference chain contains a component reference to a
6918 non-union type and there follows another field the reference
6919 is not at the end of a structure. */
6920 if (TREE_CODE (ref
) == COMPONENT_REF
6921 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (ref
, 0))) == RECORD_TYPE
)
6923 tree nextf
= DECL_CHAIN (TREE_OPERAND (ref
, 1));
6924 while (nextf
&& TREE_CODE (nextf
) != FIELD_DECL
)
6925 nextf
= DECL_CHAIN (nextf
);
6930 ref
= TREE_OPERAND (ref
, 0);
6933 /* If the reference is based on a declared entity, the size of the array
6934 is constrained by its given domain. */
6941 /* Return a tree representing the upper bound of the array mentioned in
6942 EXP, an ARRAY_REF or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF. */
6945 array_ref_up_bound (tree exp
)
6947 tree domain_type
= TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
6949 /* If there is a domain type and it has an upper bound, use it, substituting
6950 for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */
6951 if (domain_type
&& TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type
))
6952 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type
), exp
);
6954 /* Otherwise fail. */
6958 /* Return a tree representing the offset, in bytes, of the field referenced
6959 by EXP. This does not include any offset in DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET. */
6962 component_ref_field_offset (tree exp
)
6964 tree aligned_offset
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
6965 tree field
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6966 location_t loc
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
6968 /* If an offset was specified in the COMPONENT_REF, it's the offset measured
6969 in units of DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN / BITS_PER_UNIT. So multiply by that
6973 /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to
6974 sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */
6975 if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_offset
) != sizetype
)
6976 aligned_offset
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
, aligned_offset
);
6977 return size_binop_loc (loc
, MULT_EXPR
, aligned_offset
,
6978 size_int (DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN (field
)
6982 /* Otherwise, take the offset from that of the field. Substitute
6983 any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */
6985 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field
), exp
);
6988 /* Alignment in bits the TARGET of an assignment may be assumed to have. */
6990 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
6991 target_align (const_tree target
)
6993 /* We might have a chain of nested references with intermediate misaligning
6994 bitfields components, so need to recurse to find out. */
6996 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT this_align
, outer_align
;
6998 switch (TREE_CODE (target
))
7004 this_align
= DECL_ALIGN (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 1));
7005 outer_align
= target_align (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 0));
7006 return MIN (this_align
, outer_align
);
7009 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF
:
7010 this_align
= TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (target
));
7011 outer_align
= target_align (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 0));
7012 return MIN (this_align
, outer_align
);
7015 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR
:
7016 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
:
7017 this_align
= TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (target
));
7018 outer_align
= target_align (TREE_OPERAND (target
, 0));
7019 return MAX (this_align
, outer_align
);
7022 return TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (target
));
7027 /* Given an rtx VALUE that may contain additions and multiplications, return
7028 an equivalent value that just refers to a register, memory, or constant.
7029 This is done by generating instructions to perform the arithmetic and
7030 returning a pseudo-register containing the value.
7032 The returned value may be a REG, SUBREG, MEM or constant. */
7035 force_operand (rtx value
, rtx target
)
7038 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
7039 rtx subtarget
= get_subtarget (target
);
7040 enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (value
);
7042 /* Check for subreg applied to an expression produced by loop optimizer. */
7044 && !REG_P (SUBREG_REG (value
))
7045 && !MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value
)))
7048 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value
),
7049 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
7050 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value
),
7052 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
7053 SUBREG_BYTE (value
));
7054 code
= GET_CODE (value
);
7057 /* Check for a PIC address load. */
7058 if ((code
== PLUS
|| code
== MINUS
)
7059 && XEXP (value
, 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx
7060 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF
7061 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == LABEL_REF
7062 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == CONST
))
7065 subtarget
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value
));
7066 emit_move_insn (subtarget
, value
);
7070 if (ARITHMETIC_P (value
))
7072 op2
= XEXP (value
, 1);
7073 if (!CONSTANT_P (op2
) && !(REG_P (op2
) && op2
!= subtarget
))
7075 if (code
== MINUS
&& CONST_INT_P (op2
))
7078 op2
= negate_rtx (GET_MODE (value
), op2
);
7081 /* Check for an addition with OP2 a constant integer and our first
7082 operand a PLUS of a virtual register and something else. In that
7083 case, we want to emit the sum of the virtual register and the
7084 constant first and then add the other value. This allows virtual
7085 register instantiation to simply modify the constant rather than
7086 creating another one around this addition. */
7087 if (code
== PLUS
&& CONST_INT_P (op2
)
7088 && GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 0)) == PLUS
7089 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0))
7090 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0)) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
7091 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0)) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
)
7093 rtx temp
= expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
,
7094 XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0), op2
,
7095 subtarget
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7096 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, temp
,
7097 force_operand (XEXP (XEXP (value
,
7099 target
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7102 op1
= force_operand (XEXP (value
, 0), subtarget
);
7103 op2
= force_operand (op2
, NULL_RTX
);
7107 return expand_mult (GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
, target
, 1);
7109 if (!INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value
)))
7110 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, op2
,
7111 target
, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7113 return expand_divmod (0,
7114 FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value
))
7115 ? RDIV_EXPR
: TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
,
7116 GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
, target
, 0);
7118 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
, GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
,
7121 return expand_divmod (0, TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
, GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
,
7124 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
, GET_MODE (value
), op1
, op2
,
7127 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, op2
,
7128 target
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7130 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, op2
,
7131 target
, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7134 if (UNARY_P (value
))
7137 target
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value
));
7138 op1
= force_operand (XEXP (value
, 0), NULL_RTX
);
7145 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE
:
7146 convert_move (target
, op1
, code
== ZERO_EXTEND
);
7151 expand_fix (target
, op1
, code
== UNSIGNED_FIX
);
7155 case UNSIGNED_FLOAT
:
7156 expand_float (target
, op1
, code
== UNSIGNED_FLOAT
);
7160 return expand_simple_unop (GET_MODE (value
), code
, op1
, target
, 0);
7164 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
7165 /* On machines that have insn scheduling, we want all memory reference to be
7166 explicit, so we need to deal with such paradoxical SUBREGs. */
7167 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (value
) && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value
)))
7169 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value
),
7170 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
7171 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value
),
7173 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value
)),
7174 SUBREG_BYTE (value
));
7180 /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff there is no way that
7181 EXP can reference X, which is being modified. TOP_P is nonzero if this
7182 call is going to be used to determine whether we need a temporary
7183 for EXP, as opposed to a recursive call to this function.
7185 It is always safe for this routine to return zero since it merely
7186 searches for optimization opportunities. */
7189 safe_from_p (const_rtx x
, tree exp
, int top_p
)
7195 /* If EXP has varying size, we MUST use a target since we currently
7196 have no way of allocating temporaries of variable size
7197 (except for arrays that have TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE set).
7198 So we assume here that something at a higher level has prevented a
7199 clash. This is somewhat bogus, but the best we can do. Only
7200 do this when X is BLKmode and when we are at the top level. */
7201 || (top_p
&& TREE_TYPE (exp
) != 0 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
7202 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) != INTEGER_CST
7203 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) != ARRAY_TYPE
7204 || TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == NULL_TREE
7205 || TREE_CODE (TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
7207 && GET_MODE (x
) == BLKmode
)
7208 /* If X is in the outgoing argument area, it is always safe. */
7210 && (XEXP (x
, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
7211 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
7212 && XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
))))
7215 /* If this is a subreg of a hard register, declare it unsafe, otherwise,
7216 find the underlying pseudo. */
7217 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
)
7220 if (REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
7224 /* Now look at our tree code and possibly recurse. */
7225 switch (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp
)))
7227 case tcc_declaration
:
7228 exp_rtl
= DECL_RTL_IF_SET (exp
);
7234 case tcc_exceptional
:
7235 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == TREE_LIST
)
7239 if (TREE_VALUE (exp
) && !safe_from_p (x
, TREE_VALUE (exp
), 0))
7241 exp
= TREE_CHAIN (exp
);
7244 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) != TREE_LIST
)
7245 return safe_from_p (x
, exp
, 0);
7248 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
7250 constructor_elt
*ce
;
7251 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
7253 FOR_EACH_VEC_SAFE_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, ce
)
7254 if ((ce
->index
!= NULL_TREE
&& !safe_from_p (x
, ce
->index
, 0))
7255 || !safe_from_p (x
, ce
->value
, 0))
7259 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
)
7260 return 1; /* An already-visited SAVE_EXPR? */
7265 /* The only case we look at here is the DECL_INITIAL inside a
7267 return (TREE_CODE (exp
) != DECL_EXPR
7268 || TREE_CODE (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp
)) != VAR_DECL
7269 || !DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp
))
7270 || safe_from_p (x
, DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp
)), 0));
7273 case tcc_comparison
:
7274 if (!safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0))
7279 return safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
7281 case tcc_expression
:
7284 /* Now do code-specific tests. EXP_RTL is set to any rtx we find in
7285 the expression. If it is set, we conflict iff we are that rtx or
7286 both are in memory. Otherwise, we check all operands of the
7287 expression recursively. */
7289 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
7292 /* If the operand is static or we are static, we can't conflict.
7293 Likewise if we don't conflict with the operand at all. */
7294 if (staticp (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))
7295 || TREE_STATIC (exp
)
7296 || safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
7299 /* Otherwise, the only way this can conflict is if we are taking
7300 the address of a DECL a that address if part of X, which is
7302 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7305 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (exp
)
7306 || !MEM_P (DECL_RTL (exp
)))
7309 exp_rtl
= XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0);
7315 && alias_sets_conflict_p (MEM_ALIAS_SET (x
),
7316 get_alias_set (exp
)))
7321 /* Assume that the call will clobber all hard registers and
7323 if ((REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
7328 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR
:
7329 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR
:
7330 /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */
7334 return safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
7340 /* If we have an rtx, we do not need to scan our operands. */
7344 nops
= TREE_OPERAND_LENGTH (exp
);
7345 for (i
= 0; i
< nops
; i
++)
7346 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
) != 0
7347 && ! safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
), 0))
7353 /* Should never get a type here. */
7357 /* If we have an rtl, find any enclosed object. Then see if we conflict
7361 if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl
) == SUBREG
)
7363 exp_rtl
= SUBREG_REG (exp_rtl
);
7365 && REGNO (exp_rtl
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
7369 /* If the rtl is X, then it is not safe. Otherwise, it is unless both
7370 are memory and they conflict. */
7371 return ! (rtx_equal_p (x
, exp_rtl
)
7372 || (MEM_P (x
) && MEM_P (exp_rtl
)
7373 && true_dependence (exp_rtl
, VOIDmode
, x
)));
7376 /* If we reach here, it is safe. */
7381 /* Return the highest power of two that EXP is known to be a multiple of.
7382 This is used in updating alignment of MEMs in array references. */
7384 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
7385 highest_pow2_factor (const_tree exp
)
7387 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ret
;
7388 int trailing_zeros
= tree_ctz (exp
);
7389 if (trailing_zeros
>= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
7390 return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
;
7391 ret
= (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << trailing_zeros
;
7392 if (ret
> BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
)
7393 return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
;
7397 /* Similar, except that the alignment requirements of TARGET are
7398 taken into account. Assume it is at least as aligned as its
7399 type, unless it is a COMPONENT_REF in which case the layout of
7400 the structure gives the alignment. */
7402 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
7403 highest_pow2_factor_for_target (const_tree target
, const_tree exp
)
7405 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT talign
= target_align (target
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
;
7406 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT factor
= highest_pow2_factor (exp
);
7408 return MAX (factor
, talign
);
7411 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
7412 /* Convert the tree comparison code TCODE to the rtl one where the
7413 signedness is UNSIGNEDP. */
7415 static enum rtx_code
7416 convert_tree_comp_to_rtx (enum tree_code tcode
, int unsignedp
)
7428 code
= unsignedp
? LTU
: LT
;
7431 code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
7434 code
= unsignedp
? GTU
: GT
;
7437 code
= unsignedp
? GEU
: GE
;
7439 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
7471 /* Subroutine of expand_expr. Expand the two operands of a binary
7472 expression EXP0 and EXP1 placing the results in OP0 and OP1.
7473 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero. The
7474 MODIFIER argument is as documented by expand_expr. */
7477 expand_operands (tree exp0
, tree exp1
, rtx target
, rtx
*op0
, rtx
*op1
,
7478 enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7480 if (! safe_from_p (target
, exp1
, 1))
7482 if (operand_equal_p (exp0
, exp1
, 0))
7484 *op0
= expand_expr (exp0
, target
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7485 *op1
= copy_rtx (*op0
);
7489 /* If we need to preserve evaluation order, copy exp0 into its own
7490 temporary variable so that it can't be clobbered by exp1. */
7491 if (flag_evaluation_order
&& TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp1
))
7492 exp0
= save_expr (exp0
);
7493 *op0
= expand_expr (exp0
, target
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7494 *op1
= expand_expr (exp1
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7499 /* Return a MEM that contains constant EXP. DEFER is as for
7500 output_constant_def and MODIFIER is as for expand_expr. */
7503 expand_expr_constant (tree exp
, int defer
, enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7507 mem
= output_constant_def (exp
, defer
);
7508 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7509 mem
= use_anchored_address (mem
);
7513 /* A subroutine of expand_expr_addr_expr. Evaluate the address of EXP.
7514 The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */
7517 expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7518 enum expand_modifier modifier
, addr_space_t as
)
7520 rtx result
, subtarget
;
7522 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
7523 int volatilep
, unsignedp
;
7524 enum machine_mode mode1
;
7526 /* If we are taking the address of a constant and are at the top level,
7527 we have to use output_constant_def since we can't call force_const_mem
7529 /* ??? This should be considered a front-end bug. We should not be
7530 generating ADDR_EXPR of something that isn't an LVALUE. The only
7531 exception here is STRING_CST. */
7532 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (exp
))
7534 result
= XEXP (expand_expr_constant (exp
, 0, modifier
), 0);
7535 if (modifier
< EXPAND_SUM
)
7536 result
= force_operand (result
, target
);
7540 /* Everything must be something allowed by is_gimple_addressable. */
7541 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
7544 /* This case will happen via recursion for &a->b. */
7545 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
7549 tree tem
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7550 if (!integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
7551 tem
= fold_build_pointer_plus (tem
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
7552 return expand_expr (tem
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
7556 /* Expand the initializer like constants above. */
7557 result
= XEXP (expand_expr_constant (DECL_INITIAL (exp
),
7559 if (modifier
< EXPAND_SUM
)
7560 result
= force_operand (result
, target
);
7564 /* The real part of the complex number is always first, therefore
7565 the address is the same as the address of the parent object. */
7568 inner
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7572 /* The imaginary part of the complex number is always second.
7573 The expression is therefore always offset by the size of the
7576 bitpos
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
7577 inner
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7580 case COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR
:
7581 /* Allow COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR in initializers, if e.g.
7582 rtl_for_decl_init is called on DECL_INITIAL with
7583 COMPOUNT_LITERAL_EXPRs in it, they aren't gimplified. */
7584 if (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7585 && COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR_DECL (exp
))
7586 return expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR_DECL (exp
),
7587 target
, tmode
, modifier
, as
);
7590 /* If the object is a DECL, then expand it for its rtl. Don't bypass
7591 expand_expr, as that can have various side effects; LABEL_DECLs for
7592 example, may not have their DECL_RTL set yet. Expand the rtl of
7593 CONSTRUCTORs too, which should yield a memory reference for the
7594 constructor's contents. Assume language specific tree nodes can
7595 be expanded in some interesting way. */
7596 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (exp
) < LAST_AND_UNUSED_TREE_CODE
);
7598 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
7599 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR
)
7601 result
= expand_expr (exp
, target
, tmode
,
7602 modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7603 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER
: EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
);
7605 /* If the DECL isn't in memory, then the DECL wasn't properly
7606 marked TREE_ADDRESSABLE, which will be either a front-end
7607 or a tree optimizer bug. */
7609 if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
)
7611 && ! targetm
.calls
.allocate_stack_slots_for_args ())
7613 error ("local frame unavailable (naked function?)");
7617 gcc_assert (MEM_P (result
));
7618 result
= XEXP (result
, 0);
7620 /* ??? Is this needed anymore? */
7622 TREE_USED (exp
) = 1;
7624 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7625 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7626 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
)
7627 result
= force_operand (result
, target
);
7631 /* Pass FALSE as the last argument to get_inner_reference although
7632 we are expanding to RTL. The rationale is that we know how to
7633 handle "aligning nodes" here: we can just bypass them because
7634 they won't change the final object whose address will be returned
7635 (they actually exist only for that purpose). */
7636 inner
= get_inner_reference (exp
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
,
7637 &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
);
7641 /* We must have made progress. */
7642 gcc_assert (inner
!= exp
);
7644 subtarget
= offset
|| bitpos
? NULL_RTX
: target
;
7645 /* For VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR, where the outer alignment is bigger than
7646 inner alignment, force the inner to be sufficiently aligned. */
7647 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (inner
)
7648 && TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (inner
)) < TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
7650 inner
= copy_node (inner
);
7651 TREE_TYPE (inner
) = copy_node (TREE_TYPE (inner
));
7652 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (inner
)) = TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
7653 TYPE_USER_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (inner
)) = 1;
7655 result
= expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (inner
, subtarget
, tmode
, modifier
, as
);
7661 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_NORMAL
)
7662 result
= force_operand (result
, NULL
);
7663 tmp
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, tmode
,
7664 modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7665 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
7667 result
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, result
, as
);
7668 tmp
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, tmp
, as
);
7670 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7671 result
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, tmode
, result
, tmp
);
7674 subtarget
= bitpos
? NULL_RTX
: target
;
7675 result
= expand_simple_binop (tmode
, PLUS
, result
, tmp
, subtarget
,
7676 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7682 /* Someone beforehand should have rejected taking the address
7683 of such an object. */
7684 gcc_assert ((bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0);
7686 result
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, result
, as
);
7687 result
= plus_constant (tmode
, result
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
7688 if (modifier
< EXPAND_SUM
)
7689 result
= force_operand (result
, target
);
7695 /* A subroutine of expand_expr. Evaluate EXP, which is an ADDR_EXPR.
7696 The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */
7699 expand_expr_addr_expr (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7700 enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7702 addr_space_t as
= ADDR_SPACE_GENERIC
;
7703 enum machine_mode address_mode
= Pmode
;
7704 enum machine_mode pointer_mode
= ptr_mode
;
7705 enum machine_mode rmode
;
7708 /* Target mode of VOIDmode says "whatever's natural". */
7709 if (tmode
== VOIDmode
)
7710 tmode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
7712 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
7714 as
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
7715 address_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (as
);
7716 pointer_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.pointer_mode (as
);
7719 /* We can get called with some Weird Things if the user does silliness
7720 like "(short) &a". In that case, convert_memory_address won't do
7721 the right thing, so ignore the given target mode. */
7722 if (tmode
!= address_mode
&& tmode
!= pointer_mode
)
7723 tmode
= address_mode
;
7725 result
= expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
,
7726 tmode
, modifier
, as
);
7728 /* Despite expand_expr claims concerning ignoring TMODE when not
7729 strictly convenient, stuff breaks if we don't honor it. Note
7730 that combined with the above, we only do this for pointer modes. */
7731 rmode
= GET_MODE (result
);
7732 if (rmode
== VOIDmode
)
7735 result
= convert_memory_address_addr_space (tmode
, result
, as
);
7740 /* Generate code for computing CONSTRUCTOR EXP.
7741 An rtx for the computed value is returned. If AVOID_TEMP_MEM
7742 is TRUE, instead of creating a temporary variable in memory
7743 NULL is returned and the caller needs to handle it differently. */
7746 expand_constructor (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum expand_modifier modifier
,
7747 bool avoid_temp_mem
)
7749 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
7750 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7752 /* Try to avoid creating a temporary at all. This is possible
7753 if all of the initializer is zero.
7754 FIXME: try to handle all [0..255] initializers we can handle
7756 if (TREE_STATIC (exp
)
7757 && !TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
)
7758 && target
!= 0 && mode
== BLKmode
7759 && all_zeros_p (exp
))
7761 clear_storage (target
, expr_size (exp
), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
);
7765 /* All elts simple constants => refer to a constant in memory. But
7766 if this is a non-BLKmode mode, let it store a field at a time
7767 since that should make a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE when we
7768 fold. Likewise, if we have a target we can use, it is best to
7769 store directly into the target unless the type is large enough
7770 that memcpy will be used. If we are making an initializer and
7771 all operands are constant, put it in memory as well.
7773 FIXME: Avoid trying to fill vector constructors piece-meal.
7774 Output them with output_constant_def below unless we're sure
7775 they're zeros. This should go away when vector initializers
7776 are treated like VECTOR_CST instead of arrays. */
7777 if ((TREE_STATIC (exp
)
7778 && ((mode
== BLKmode
7779 && ! (target
!= 0 && safe_from_p (target
, exp
, 1)))
7780 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
)
7781 || (tree_fits_uhwi_p (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type
))
7782 && (! MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
7783 (tree_to_uhwi (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type
)),
7785 && ! mostly_zeros_p (exp
))))
7786 || ((modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
|| modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
)
7787 && TREE_CONSTANT (exp
)))
7794 constructor
= expand_expr_constant (exp
, 1, modifier
);
7796 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7797 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7798 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
)
7799 constructor
= validize_mem (constructor
);
7804 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous
7805 locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
7806 if (target
== 0 || ! safe_from_p (target
, exp
, 1)
7807 || GET_CODE (target
) == PARALLEL
|| modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
7813 = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type
, (TYPE_QUALS (type
)
7814 | (TREE_READONLY (exp
)
7815 * TYPE_QUAL_CONST
))),
7816 TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
), 1);
7819 store_constructor (exp
, target
, 0, int_expr_size (exp
));
7824 /* expand_expr: generate code for computing expression EXP.
7825 An rtx for the computed value is returned. The value is never null.
7826 In the case of a void EXP, const0_rtx is returned.
7828 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero.
7829 TARGET is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
7830 the rtx returned may not be the same as TARGET.
7832 If TARGET is CONST0_RTX, it means that the value will be ignored.
7834 If TMODE is not VOIDmode, it suggests generating the
7835 result in mode TMODE. But this is done only when convenient.
7836 Otherwise, TMODE is ignored and the value generated in its natural mode.
7837 TMODE is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
7838 the rtx returned may not have mode TMODE.
7840 Note that TARGET may have neither TMODE nor MODE. In that case, it
7841 probably will not be used.
7843 If MODIFIER is EXPAND_SUM then when EXP is an addition
7844 we can return an rtx of the form (MULT (REG ...) (CONST_INT ...))
7845 or a nest of (PLUS ...) and (MINUS ...) where the terms are
7846 products as above, or REG or MEM, or constant.
7847 Ordinarily in such cases we would output mul or add instructions
7848 and then return a pseudo reg containing the sum.
7850 EXPAND_INITIALIZER is much like EXPAND_SUM except that
7851 it also marks a label as absolutely required (it can't be dead).
7852 It also makes a ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND instead of emitting extend insns.
7853 This is used for outputting expressions used in initializers.
7855 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS says that it is okay to return a MEM
7856 with a constant address even if that address is not normally legitimate.
7857 EXPAND_INITIALIZER and EXPAND_SUM also have this effect.
7859 EXPAND_STACK_PARM is used when expanding to a TARGET on the stack for
7860 a call parameter. Such targets require special care as we haven't yet
7861 marked TARGET so that it's safe from being trashed by libcalls. We
7862 don't want to use TARGET for anything but the final result;
7863 Intermediate values must go elsewhere. Additionally, calls to
7864 emit_block_move will be flagged with BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM.
7866 If EXP is a VAR_DECL whose DECL_RTL was a MEM with an invalid
7867 address, and ALT_RTL is non-NULL, then *ALT_RTL is set to the
7868 DECL_RTL of the VAR_DECL. *ALT_RTL is also set if EXP is a
7869 COMPOUND_EXPR whose second argument is such a VAR_DECL, and so on
7873 expand_expr_real (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7874 enum expand_modifier modifier
, rtx
*alt_rtl
)
7878 /* Handle ERROR_MARK before anybody tries to access its type. */
7879 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
7880 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == ERROR_MARK
))
7882 ret
= CONST0_RTX (tmode
);
7883 return ret
? ret
: const0_rtx
;
7886 ret
= expand_expr_real_1 (exp
, target
, tmode
, modifier
, alt_rtl
);
7890 /* Try to expand the conditional expression which is represented by
7891 TREEOP0 ? TREEOP1 : TREEOP2 using conditonal moves. If succeseds
7892 return the rtl reg which repsents the result. Otherwise return
7896 expand_cond_expr_using_cmove (tree treeop0 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
7897 tree treeop1 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
,
7898 tree treeop2 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
)
7900 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
7902 rtx op00
, op01
, op1
, op2
;
7903 enum rtx_code comparison_code
;
7904 enum machine_mode comparison_mode
;
7907 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop1
);
7908 int unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
7909 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7910 enum machine_mode orig_mode
= mode
;
7912 /* If we cannot do a conditional move on the mode, try doing it
7913 with the promoted mode. */
7914 if (!can_conditionally_move_p (mode
))
7916 mode
= promote_mode (type
, mode
, &unsignedp
);
7917 if (!can_conditionally_move_p (mode
))
7919 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 0); /* Use promoted mode for temp. */
7922 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1);
7925 expand_operands (treeop1
, treeop2
,
7926 temp
, &op1
, &op2
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
7928 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == SSA_NAME
7929 && (srcstmt
= get_def_for_expr_class (treeop0
, tcc_comparison
)))
7931 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (gimple_assign_rhs1 (srcstmt
));
7932 enum tree_code cmpcode
= gimple_assign_rhs_code (srcstmt
);
7933 op00
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (srcstmt
));
7934 op01
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs2 (srcstmt
));
7935 comparison_mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7936 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
7937 comparison_code
= convert_tree_comp_to_rtx (cmpcode
, unsignedp
);
7939 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (treeop0
)) == tcc_comparison
)
7941 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 0));
7942 enum tree_code cmpcode
= TREE_CODE (treeop0
);
7943 op00
= expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 0));
7944 op01
= expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 1));
7945 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
7946 comparison_mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
7947 comparison_code
= convert_tree_comp_to_rtx (cmpcode
, unsignedp
);
7951 op00
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
7953 comparison_code
= NE
;
7954 comparison_mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
));
7957 if (GET_MODE (op1
) != mode
)
7958 op1
= gen_lowpart (mode
, op1
);
7960 if (GET_MODE (op2
) != mode
)
7961 op2
= gen_lowpart (mode
, op2
);
7963 /* Try to emit the conditional move. */
7964 insn
= emit_conditional_move (temp
, comparison_code
,
7965 op00
, op01
, comparison_mode
,
7969 /* If we could do the conditional move, emit the sequence,
7973 rtx seq
= get_insns ();
7976 return convert_modes (orig_mode
, mode
, temp
, 0);
7979 /* Otherwise discard the sequence and fall back to code with
7987 expand_expr_real_2 (sepops ops
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
7988 enum expand_modifier modifier
)
7990 rtx op0
, op1
, op2
, temp
;
7993 enum machine_mode mode
;
7994 enum tree_code code
= ops
->code
;
7996 rtx subtarget
, original_target
;
7998 bool reduce_bit_field
;
7999 location_t loc
= ops
->location
;
8000 tree treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
;
8001 #define REDUCE_BIT_FIELD(expr) (reduce_bit_field \
8002 ? reduce_to_bit_field_precision ((expr), \
8008 mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
8009 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
8015 /* We should be called only on simple (binary or unary) expressions,
8016 exactly those that are valid in gimple expressions that aren't
8017 GIMPLE_SINGLE_RHS (or invalid). */
8018 gcc_assert (get_gimple_rhs_class (code
) == GIMPLE_UNARY_RHS
8019 || get_gimple_rhs_class (code
) == GIMPLE_BINARY_RHS
8020 || get_gimple_rhs_class (code
) == GIMPLE_TERNARY_RHS
);
8022 ignore
= (target
== const0_rtx
8023 || ((CONVERT_EXPR_CODE_P (code
)
8024 || code
== COND_EXPR
|| code
== VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
)
8025 && TREE_CODE (type
) == VOID_TYPE
));
8027 /* We should be called only if we need the result. */
8028 gcc_assert (!ignore
);
8030 /* An operation in what may be a bit-field type needs the
8031 result to be reduced to the precision of the bit-field type,
8032 which is narrower than that of the type's mode. */
8033 reduce_bit_field
= (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
8034 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > TYPE_PRECISION (type
));
8036 if (reduce_bit_field
&& modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8039 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
8040 subtarget
= get_subtarget (target
);
8041 original_target
= target
;
8045 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR
:
8048 if (treeop0
== error_mark_node
)
8051 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
)
8053 tree valtype
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
8055 /* If both input and output are BLKmode, this conversion isn't doing
8056 anything except possibly changing memory attribute. */
8057 if (mode
== BLKmode
&& TYPE_MODE (valtype
) == BLKmode
)
8059 rtx result
= expand_expr (treeop0
, target
, tmode
,
8062 result
= copy_rtx (result
);
8063 set_mem_attributes (result
, type
, 0);
8069 if (TYPE_MODE (type
) != BLKmode
)
8070 target
= gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (type
));
8072 target
= assign_temp (type
, 1, 1);
8076 /* Store data into beginning of memory target. */
8077 store_expr (treeop0
,
8078 adjust_address (target
, TYPE_MODE (valtype
), 0),
8079 modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
,
8084 gcc_assert (REG_P (target
));
8086 /* Store this field into a union of the proper type. */
8087 store_field (target
,
8088 MIN ((int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE
8091 (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
)),
8092 0, 0, 0, TYPE_MODE (valtype
), treeop0
, 0, false);
8095 /* Return the entire union. */
8099 if (mode
== TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8101 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, target
, VOIDmode
,
8104 /* If the signedness of the conversion differs and OP0 is
8105 a promoted SUBREG, clear that indication since we now
8106 have to do the proper extension. */
8107 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) != unsignedp
8108 && GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
)
8109 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op0
) = 0;
8111 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0
);
8114 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, NULL_RTX
, mode
,
8115 modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
? EXPAND_NORMAL
: modifier
);
8116 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == mode
)
8119 /* If OP0 is a constant, just convert it into the proper mode. */
8120 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0
))
8122 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
8123 enum machine_mode inner_mode
= GET_MODE (op0
);
8125 if (inner_mode
== VOIDmode
)
8126 inner_mode
= TYPE_MODE (inner_type
);
8128 if (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8129 op0
= simplify_gen_subreg (mode
, op0
, inner_mode
,
8130 subreg_lowpart_offset (mode
,
8133 op0
= convert_modes (mode
, inner_mode
, op0
,
8134 TYPE_UNSIGNED (inner_type
));
8137 else if (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8138 op0
= gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
, mode
, op0
);
8140 else if (target
== 0)
8141 op0
= convert_to_mode (mode
, op0
,
8142 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE
8146 convert_move (target
, op0
,
8147 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
8151 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0
);
8153 case ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT_EXPR
:
8155 tree treeop0_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
8157 addr_space_t as_from
;
8159 gcc_assert (POINTER_TYPE_P (type
));
8160 gcc_assert (POINTER_TYPE_P (treeop0_type
));
8162 as_to
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (type
));
8163 as_from
= TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0_type
));
8165 /* Conversions between pointers to the same address space should
8166 have been implemented via CONVERT_EXPR / NOP_EXPR. */
8167 gcc_assert (as_to
!= as_from
);
8169 /* Ask target code to handle conversion between pointers
8170 to overlapping address spaces. */
8171 if (targetm
.addr_space
.subset_p (as_to
, as_from
)
8172 || targetm
.addr_space
.subset_p (as_from
, as_to
))
8174 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8175 op0
= targetm
.addr_space
.convert (op0
, treeop0_type
, type
);
8180 /* For disjoint address spaces, converting anything but
8181 a null pointer invokes undefined behaviour. We simply
8182 always return a null pointer here. */
8183 return CONST0_RTX (mode
);
8186 case POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
:
8187 /* Even though the sizetype mode and the pointer's mode can be different
8188 expand is able to handle this correctly and get the correct result out
8189 of the PLUS_EXPR code. */
8190 /* Make sure to sign-extend the sizetype offset in a POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
8191 if sizetype precision is smaller than pointer precision. */
8192 if (TYPE_PRECISION (sizetype
) < TYPE_PRECISION (type
))
8193 treeop1
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, type
,
8194 fold_convert_loc (loc
, ssizetype
,
8196 /* If sizetype precision is larger than pointer precision, truncate the
8197 offset to have matching modes. */
8198 else if (TYPE_PRECISION (sizetype
) > TYPE_PRECISION (type
))
8199 treeop1
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, type
, treeop1
);
8202 /* If we are adding a constant, a VAR_DECL that is sp, fp, or ap, and
8203 something else, make sure we add the register to the constant and
8204 then to the other thing. This case can occur during strength
8205 reduction and doing it this way will produce better code if the
8206 frame pointer or argument pointer is eliminated.
8208 fold-const.c will ensure that the constant is always in the inner
8209 PLUS_EXPR, so the only case we need to do anything about is if
8210 sp, ap, or fp is our second argument, in which case we must swap
8211 the innermost first argument and our second argument. */
8213 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == PLUS_EXPR
8214 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (treeop0
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8215 && TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == VAR_DECL
8216 && (DECL_RTL (treeop1
) == frame_pointer_rtx
8217 || DECL_RTL (treeop1
) == stack_pointer_rtx
8218 || DECL_RTL (treeop1
) == arg_pointer_rtx
))
8223 /* If the result is to be ptr_mode and we are adding an integer to
8224 something, we might be forming a constant. So try to use
8225 plus_constant. If it produces a sum and we can't accept it,
8226 use force_operand. This allows P = &ARR[const] to generate
8227 efficient code on machines where a SYMBOL_REF is not a valid
8230 If this is an EXPAND_SUM call, always return the sum. */
8231 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8232 || (mode
== ptr_mode
&& (unsignedp
|| ! flag_trapv
)))
8234 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8236 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == INTEGER_CST
8237 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8238 && TREE_CONSTANT (treeop1
))
8242 op1
= expand_expr (treeop1
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
8244 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
8245 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
8246 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
8247 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
8249 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (treeop0
),
8251 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
)));
8252 op1
= plus_constant (mode
, op1
, INTVAL (constant_part
));
8253 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8254 op1
= force_operand (op1
, target
);
8255 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op1
);
8258 else if (TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == INTEGER_CST
8259 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8260 && TREE_CONSTANT (treeop0
))
8264 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
8265 (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8266 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER
: EXPAND_SUM
));
8267 if (! CONSTANT_P (op0
))
8269 op1
= expand_expr (treeop1
, NULL_RTX
,
8270 VOIDmode
, modifier
);
8271 /* Return a PLUS if modifier says it's OK. */
8272 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
8273 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8274 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, op0
, op1
);
8277 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
8278 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
8279 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
8280 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
8282 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (treeop1
),
8284 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
8285 op0
= plus_constant (mode
, op0
, INTVAL (constant_part
));
8286 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8287 op0
= force_operand (op0
, target
);
8288 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0
);
8292 /* Use TER to expand pointer addition of a negated value
8293 as pointer subtraction. */
8294 if ((POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))
8295 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) == VECTOR_TYPE
8296 && POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))))
8297 && TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == SSA_NAME
8298 && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))
8299 == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
)))
8301 gimple def
= get_def_for_expr (treeop1
, NEGATE_EXPR
);
8304 treeop1
= gimple_assign_rhs1 (def
);
8310 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
8311 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
8312 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
8314 if ((modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8315 || mode
!= ptr_mode
)
8317 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8318 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8319 if (op0
== const0_rtx
)
8321 if (op1
== const0_rtx
)
8326 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8327 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, modifier
);
8328 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, op0
, op1
));
8332 /* For initializers, we are allowed to return a MINUS of two
8333 symbolic constants. Here we handle all cases when both operands
8335 /* Handle difference of two symbolic constants,
8336 for the sake of an initializer. */
8337 if ((modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8338 && really_constant_p (treeop0
)
8339 && really_constant_p (treeop1
))
8341 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8342 NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, modifier
);
8344 /* If the last operand is a CONST_INT, use plus_constant of
8345 the negated constant. Else make the MINUS. */
8346 if (CONST_INT_P (op1
))
8347 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (plus_constant (mode
, op0
,
8350 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MINUS (mode
, op0
, op1
));
8353 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
8354 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
8355 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
8357 if ((modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8358 || mode
!= ptr_mode
)
8361 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8362 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, modifier
);
8364 /* Convert A - const to A + (-const). */
8365 if (CONST_INT_P (op1
))
8367 op1
= negate_rtx (mode
, op1
);
8368 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, mode
, op0
, op1
));
8373 case WIDEN_MULT_PLUS_EXPR
:
8374 case WIDEN_MULT_MINUS_EXPR
:
8375 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8376 op2
= expand_normal (treeop2
);
8377 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, op1
, op2
,
8381 case WIDEN_MULT_EXPR
:
8382 /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
8383 Thus the following special case checks need only
8384 check the second operand. */
8385 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == INTEGER_CST
)
8392 /* First, check if we have a multiplication of one signed and one
8393 unsigned operand. */
8394 if (TREE_CODE (treeop1
) != INTEGER_CST
8395 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))
8396 != TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
))))
8398 enum machine_mode innermode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
));
8399 this_optab
= usmul_widen_optab
;
8400 if (find_widening_optab_handler (this_optab
, mode
, innermode
, 0)
8401 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8403 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8404 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
,
8407 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op1
, &op0
,
8409 /* op0 and op1 might still be constant, despite the above
8410 != INTEGER_CST check. Handle it. */
8411 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
&& GET_MODE (op1
) == VOIDmode
)
8413 op0
= convert_modes (innermode
, mode
, op0
, true);
8414 op1
= convert_modes (innermode
, mode
, op1
, false);
8415 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
,
8416 target
, unsignedp
));
8421 /* Check for a multiplication with matching signedness. */
8422 else if ((TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == INTEGER_CST
8423 && int_fits_type_p (treeop1
, TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8424 || (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
))
8425 == TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
))))
8427 tree op0type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
8428 enum machine_mode innermode
= TYPE_MODE (op0type
);
8429 bool zextend_p
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (op0type
);
8430 optab other_optab
= zextend_p
? smul_widen_optab
: umul_widen_optab
;
8431 this_optab
= zextend_p
? umul_widen_optab
: smul_widen_optab
;
8433 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) != INTEGER_CST
)
8435 if (find_widening_optab_handler (this_optab
, mode
, innermode
, 0)
8436 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8438 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
,
8440 /* op0 and op1 might still be constant, despite the above
8441 != INTEGER_CST check. Handle it. */
8442 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
&& GET_MODE (op1
) == VOIDmode
)
8445 op0
= convert_modes (innermode
, mode
, op0
, zextend_p
);
8447 = convert_modes (innermode
, mode
, op1
,
8448 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
)));
8449 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
,
8453 temp
= expand_widening_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
,
8454 unsignedp
, this_optab
);
8455 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8457 if (find_widening_optab_handler (other_optab
, mode
, innermode
, 0)
8459 && innermode
== word_mode
)
8462 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8463 if (TREE_CODE (treeop1
) == INTEGER_CST
)
8464 op1
= convert_modes (innermode
, mode
,
8465 expand_normal (treeop1
),
8466 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop1
)));
8468 op1
= expand_normal (treeop1
);
8469 /* op0 and op1 might still be constant, despite the above
8470 != INTEGER_CST check. Handle it. */
8471 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
&& GET_MODE (op1
) == VOIDmode
)
8472 goto widen_mult_const
;
8473 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, other_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
,
8474 unsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
8475 hipart
= gen_highpart (innermode
, temp
);
8476 htem
= expand_mult_highpart_adjust (innermode
, hipart
,
8480 emit_move_insn (hipart
, htem
);
8481 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8485 treeop0
= fold_build1 (CONVERT_EXPR
, type
, treeop0
);
8486 treeop1
= fold_build1 (CONVERT_EXPR
, type
, treeop1
);
8487 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8488 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
));
8492 optab opt
= fma_optab
;
8495 /* If there is no insn for FMA, emit it as __builtin_fma{,f,l}
8497 if (optab_handler (fma_optab
, mode
) == CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8499 tree fn
= mathfn_built_in (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
), BUILT_IN_FMA
);
8502 gcc_assert (fn
!= NULL_TREE
);
8503 call_expr
= build_call_expr (fn
, 3, treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
);
8504 return expand_builtin (call_expr
, target
, subtarget
, mode
, false);
8507 def0
= get_def_for_expr (treeop0
, NEGATE_EXPR
);
8508 def2
= get_def_for_expr (treeop2
, NEGATE_EXPR
);
8513 && optab_handler (fnms_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8516 op0
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def0
));
8517 op2
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def2
));
8520 && optab_handler (fnma_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8523 op0
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def0
));
8526 && optab_handler (fms_optab
, mode
) != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
8529 op2
= expand_normal (gimple_assign_rhs1 (def2
));
8533 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8535 op2
= expand_normal (treeop2
);
8536 op1
= expand_normal (treeop1
);
8538 return expand_ternary_op (TYPE_MODE (type
), opt
,
8539 op0
, op1
, op2
, target
, 0);
8543 /* If this is a fixed-point operation, then we cannot use the code
8544 below because "expand_mult" doesn't support sat/no-sat fixed-point
8546 if (ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
8549 /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
8550 Thus the following special case checks need only
8551 check the second operand. */
8552 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == INTEGER_CST
)
8559 /* Attempt to return something suitable for generating an
8560 indexed address, for machines that support that. */
8562 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
&& mode
== ptr_mode
8563 && tree_fits_shwi_p (treeop1
))
8565 tree exp1
= treeop1
;
8567 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
8571 op0
= force_operand (op0
, NULL_RTX
);
8573 op0
= copy_to_mode_reg (mode
, op0
);
8575 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MULT (mode
, op0
,
8576 gen_int_mode (tree_to_shwi (exp1
),
8577 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp1
)))));
8580 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8583 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8584 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
));
8586 case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
:
8587 case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR
:
8589 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR
:
8590 case EXACT_DIV_EXPR
:
8591 /* If this is a fixed-point operation, then we cannot use the code
8592 below because "expand_divmod" doesn't support sat/no-sat fixed-point
8594 if (ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
8597 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8599 /* Possible optimization: compute the dividend with EXPAND_SUM
8600 then if the divisor is constant can optimize the case
8601 where some terms of the dividend have coeffs divisible by it. */
8602 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8603 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8604 return expand_divmod (0, code
, mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
8609 case MULT_HIGHPART_EXPR
:
8610 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8611 temp
= expand_mult_highpart (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
8615 case TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
:
8616 case FLOOR_MOD_EXPR
:
8618 case ROUND_MOD_EXPR
:
8619 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8621 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8622 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8623 return expand_divmod (1, code
, mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
8625 case FIXED_CONVERT_EXPR
:
8626 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8627 if (target
== 0 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8628 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8630 if ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) == INTEGER_TYPE
8631 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
8632 || (TREE_CODE (type
) == INTEGER_TYPE
&& TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
)))
8633 expand_fixed_convert (target
, op0
, 1, TYPE_SATURATING (type
));
8635 expand_fixed_convert (target
, op0
, 0, TYPE_SATURATING (type
));
8638 case FIX_TRUNC_EXPR
:
8639 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8640 if (target
== 0 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8641 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8642 expand_fix (target
, op0
, unsignedp
);
8646 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8647 if (target
== 0 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8648 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8649 /* expand_float can't figure out what to do if FROM has VOIDmode.
8650 So give it the correct mode. With -O, cse will optimize this. */
8651 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
)
8652 op0
= copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)),
8654 expand_float (target
, op0
,
8655 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
8659 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8660 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8661 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8663 temp
= expand_unop (mode
,
8664 optab_for_tree_code (NEGATE_EXPR
, type
,
8668 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8671 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8672 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8673 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8676 /* ABS_EXPR is not valid for complex arguments. */
8677 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
8678 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
);
8680 /* Unsigned abs is simply the operand. Testing here means we don't
8681 risk generating incorrect code below. */
8682 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
8685 return expand_abs (mode
, op0
, target
, unsignedp
,
8686 safe_from_p (target
, treeop0
, 1));
8690 target
= original_target
;
8692 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8693 || (MEM_P (target
) && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target
))
8694 || GET_MODE (target
) != mode
8696 && REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
))
8697 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8698 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
8699 target
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8701 /* First try to do it with a special MIN or MAX instruction.
8702 If that does not win, use a conditional jump to select the proper
8704 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
8705 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
,
8710 /* At this point, a MEM target is no longer useful; we will get better
8713 if (! REG_P (target
))
8714 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8716 /* If op1 was placed in target, swap op0 and op1. */
8717 if (target
!= op0
&& target
== op1
)
8724 /* We generate better code and avoid problems with op1 mentioning
8725 target by forcing op1 into a pseudo if it isn't a constant. */
8726 if (! CONSTANT_P (op1
))
8727 op1
= force_reg (mode
, op1
);
8730 enum rtx_code comparison_code
;
8733 if (code
== MAX_EXPR
)
8734 comparison_code
= unsignedp
? GEU
: GE
;
8736 comparison_code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
8738 /* Canonicalize to comparisons against 0. */
8739 if (op1
== const1_rtx
)
8741 /* Converting (a >= 1 ? a : 1) into (a > 0 ? a : 1)
8742 or (a != 0 ? a : 1) for unsigned.
8743 For MIN we are safe converting (a <= 1 ? a : 1)
8744 into (a <= 0 ? a : 1) */
8745 cmpop1
= const0_rtx
;
8746 if (code
== MAX_EXPR
)
8747 comparison_code
= unsignedp
? NE
: GT
;
8749 if (op1
== constm1_rtx
&& !unsignedp
)
8751 /* Converting (a >= -1 ? a : -1) into (a >= 0 ? a : -1)
8752 and (a <= -1 ? a : -1) into (a < 0 ? a : -1) */
8753 cmpop1
= const0_rtx
;
8754 if (code
== MIN_EXPR
)
8755 comparison_code
= LT
;
8757 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
8758 /* Use a conditional move if possible. */
8759 if (can_conditionally_move_p (mode
))
8763 /* ??? Same problem as in expmed.c: emit_conditional_move
8764 forces a stack adjustment via compare_from_rtx, and we
8765 lose the stack adjustment if the sequence we are about
8766 to create is discarded. */
8767 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8771 /* Try to emit the conditional move. */
8772 insn
= emit_conditional_move (target
, comparison_code
,
8777 /* If we could do the conditional move, emit the sequence,
8781 rtx seq
= get_insns ();
8787 /* Otherwise discard the sequence and fall back to code with
8793 emit_move_insn (target
, op0
);
8795 temp
= gen_label_rtx ();
8796 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (target
, cmpop1
, comparison_code
,
8797 unsignedp
, mode
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
, temp
,
8800 emit_move_insn (target
, op1
);
8805 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8806 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8807 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8809 /* In case we have to reduce the result to bitfield precision
8810 for unsigned bitfield expand this as XOR with a proper constant
8812 if (reduce_bit_field
&& TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
8813 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, xor_optab
, op0
,
8814 immed_double_int_const
8815 (double_int::mask (TYPE_PRECISION (type
)), mode
),
8816 target
, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
8818 temp
= expand_unop (mode
, one_cmpl_optab
, op0
, target
, 1);
8822 /* ??? Can optimize bitwise operations with one arg constant.
8823 Can optimize (a bitwise1 n) bitwise2 (a bitwise3 b)
8824 and (a bitwise1 b) bitwise2 b (etc)
8825 but that is probably not worth while. */
8834 gcc_assert (VECTOR_MODE_P (TYPE_MODE (type
))
8835 || (GET_MODE_PRECISION (TYPE_MODE (type
))
8836 == TYPE_PRECISION (type
)));
8841 /* If this is a fixed-point operation, then we cannot use the code
8842 below because "expand_shift" doesn't support sat/no-sat fixed-point
8844 if (ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode
))
8847 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget
, treeop1
, 1))
8849 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
8851 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, subtarget
,
8852 VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8853 temp
= expand_variable_shift (code
, mode
, op0
, treeop1
, target
,
8855 if (code
== LSHIFT_EXPR
)
8856 temp
= REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
8859 /* Could determine the answer when only additive constants differ. Also,
8860 the addition of one can be handled by changing the condition. */
8867 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
8875 temp
= do_store_flag (ops
,
8876 modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
? target
: NULL_RTX
,
8877 tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
8881 /* Use a compare and a jump for BLKmode comparisons, or for function
8882 type comparisons is HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare. */
8885 || modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8886 || ! safe_from_p (target
, treeop0
, 1)
8887 || ! safe_from_p (target
, treeop1
, 1)
8888 /* Make sure we don't have a hard reg (such as function's return
8889 value) live across basic blocks, if not optimizing. */
8890 || (!optimize
&& REG_P (target
)
8891 && REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)))
8892 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
8894 emit_move_insn (target
, const0_rtx
);
8896 op1
= gen_label_rtx ();
8897 jumpifnot_1 (code
, treeop0
, treeop1
, op1
, -1);
8899 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type
) == 1 && !TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
8900 emit_move_insn (target
, constm1_rtx
);
8902 emit_move_insn (target
, const1_rtx
);
8908 /* Get the rtx code of the operands. */
8909 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8910 op1
= expand_normal (treeop1
);
8913 target
= gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (type
));
8915 /* If target overlaps with op1, then either we need to force
8916 op1 into a pseudo (if target also overlaps with op0),
8917 or write the complex parts in reverse order. */
8918 switch (GET_CODE (target
))
8921 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (target
, 0), op1
))
8923 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (target
, 1), op0
))
8925 complex_expr_force_op1
:
8926 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE_INNER (GET_MODE (target
)));
8927 emit_move_insn (temp
, op1
);
8931 complex_expr_swap_order
:
8932 /* Move the imaginary (op1) and real (op0) parts to their
8934 write_complex_part (target
, op1
, true);
8935 write_complex_part (target
, op0
, false);
8941 temp
= adjust_address_nv (target
,
8942 GET_MODE_INNER (GET_MODE (target
)), 0);
8943 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (temp
, op1
))
8945 enum machine_mode imode
= GET_MODE_INNER (GET_MODE (target
));
8946 temp
= adjust_address_nv (target
, imode
,
8947 GET_MODE_SIZE (imode
));
8948 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (temp
, op0
))
8949 goto complex_expr_force_op1
;
8950 goto complex_expr_swap_order
;
8954 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target
, op1
))
8956 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target
, op0
))
8957 goto complex_expr_force_op1
;
8958 goto complex_expr_swap_order
;
8963 /* Move the real (op0) and imaginary (op1) parts to their location. */
8964 write_complex_part (target
, op0
, false);
8965 write_complex_part (target
, op1
, true);
8969 case WIDEN_SUM_EXPR
:
8971 tree oprnd0
= treeop0
;
8972 tree oprnd1
= treeop1
;
8974 expand_operands (oprnd0
, oprnd1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8975 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, NULL_RTX
, op1
,
8980 case REDUC_MAX_EXPR
:
8981 case REDUC_MIN_EXPR
:
8982 case REDUC_PLUS_EXPR
:
8984 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
8985 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
8986 temp
= expand_unop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, target
, unsignedp
);
8991 case VEC_LSHIFT_EXPR
:
8992 case VEC_RSHIFT_EXPR
:
8994 target
= expand_vec_shift_expr (ops
, target
);
8998 case VEC_UNPACK_HI_EXPR
:
8999 case VEC_UNPACK_LO_EXPR
:
9001 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
9002 temp
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
9008 case VEC_UNPACK_FLOAT_HI_EXPR
:
9009 case VEC_UNPACK_FLOAT_LO_EXPR
:
9011 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
9012 /* The signedness is determined from input operand. */
9013 temp
= expand_widen_pattern_expr
9014 (ops
, op0
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
9015 target
, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
9021 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_HI_EXPR
:
9022 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_LO_EXPR
:
9023 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_EVEN_EXPR
:
9024 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_ODD_EXPR
:
9025 case VEC_WIDEN_LSHIFT_HI_EXPR
:
9026 case VEC_WIDEN_LSHIFT_LO_EXPR
:
9027 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9028 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, op1
, NULL_RTX
,
9030 gcc_assert (target
);
9033 case VEC_PACK_TRUNC_EXPR
:
9034 case VEC_PACK_SAT_EXPR
:
9035 case VEC_PACK_FIX_TRUNC_EXPR
:
9036 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
));
9040 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
, target
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9041 op2
= expand_normal (treeop2
);
9043 /* Careful here: if the target doesn't support integral vector modes,
9044 a constant selection vector could wind up smooshed into a normal
9045 integral constant. */
9046 if (CONSTANT_P (op2
) && GET_CODE (op2
) != CONST_VECTOR
)
9048 tree sel_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop2
);
9049 enum machine_mode vmode
9050 = mode_for_vector (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (sel_type
)),
9051 TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (sel_type
));
9052 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (vmode
) == MODE_VECTOR_INT
);
9053 op2
= simplify_subreg (vmode
, op2
, TYPE_MODE (sel_type
), 0);
9054 gcc_assert (op2
&& GET_CODE (op2
) == CONST_VECTOR
);
9057 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op2
)) == MODE_VECTOR_INT
);
9059 temp
= expand_vec_perm (mode
, op0
, op1
, op2
, target
);
9065 tree oprnd0
= treeop0
;
9066 tree oprnd1
= treeop1
;
9067 tree oprnd2
= treeop2
;
9070 expand_operands (oprnd0
, oprnd1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9071 op2
= expand_normal (oprnd2
);
9072 target
= expand_widen_pattern_expr (ops
, op0
, op1
, op2
,
9077 case REALIGN_LOAD_EXPR
:
9079 tree oprnd0
= treeop0
;
9080 tree oprnd1
= treeop1
;
9081 tree oprnd2
= treeop2
;
9084 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
9085 expand_operands (oprnd0
, oprnd1
, NULL_RTX
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9086 op2
= expand_normal (oprnd2
);
9087 temp
= expand_ternary_op (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, op2
,
9094 /* A COND_EXPR with its type being VOID_TYPE represents a
9095 conditional jump and is handled in
9096 expand_gimple_cond_expr. */
9097 gcc_assert (!VOID_TYPE_P (type
));
9099 /* Note that COND_EXPRs whose type is a structure or union
9100 are required to be constructed to contain assignments of
9101 a temporary variable, so that we can evaluate them here
9102 for side effect only. If type is void, we must do likewise. */
9104 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type
)
9106 && TREE_TYPE (treeop1
) != void_type_node
9107 && TREE_TYPE (treeop2
) != void_type_node
);
9109 temp
= expand_cond_expr_using_cmove (treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
);
9113 /* If we are not to produce a result, we have no target. Otherwise,
9114 if a target was specified use it; it will not be used as an
9115 intermediate target unless it is safe. If no target, use a
9118 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9120 && safe_from_p (original_target
, treeop0
, 1)
9121 && GET_MODE (original_target
) == mode
9122 && !MEM_P (original_target
))
9123 temp
= original_target
;
9125 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1);
9127 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9129 op0
= gen_label_rtx ();
9130 op1
= gen_label_rtx ();
9131 jumpifnot (treeop0
, op0
, -1);
9132 store_expr (treeop1
, temp
,
9133 modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
,
9136 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (op1
));
9139 store_expr (treeop2
, temp
,
9140 modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
,
9148 target
= expand_vec_cond_expr (type
, treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
, target
);
9155 /* Here to do an ordinary binary operator. */
9157 expand_operands (treeop0
, treeop1
,
9158 subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9160 this_optab
= optab_for_tree_code (code
, type
, optab_default
);
9162 if (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
9164 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
,
9165 unsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
9167 /* Bitwise operations do not need bitfield reduction as we expect their
9168 operands being properly truncated. */
9169 if (code
== BIT_XOR_EXPR
9170 || code
== BIT_AND_EXPR
9171 || code
== BIT_IOR_EXPR
)
9173 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp
);
9175 #undef REDUCE_BIT_FIELD
9178 /* Return TRUE if expression STMT is suitable for replacement.
9179 Never consider memory loads as replaceable, because those don't ever lead
9180 into constant expressions. */
9183 stmt_is_replaceable_p (gimple stmt
)
9185 if (ssa_is_replaceable_p (stmt
))
9187 /* Don't move around loads. */
9188 if (!gimple_assign_single_p (stmt
)
9189 || is_gimple_val (gimple_assign_rhs1 (stmt
)))
9196 expand_expr_real_1 (tree exp
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode tmode
,
9197 enum expand_modifier modifier
, rtx
*alt_rtl
)
9199 rtx op0
, op1
, temp
, decl_rtl
;
9202 enum machine_mode mode
;
9203 enum tree_code code
= TREE_CODE (exp
);
9204 rtx subtarget
, original_target
;
9207 bool reduce_bit_field
;
9208 location_t loc
= EXPR_LOCATION (exp
);
9209 struct separate_ops ops
;
9210 tree treeop0
, treeop1
, treeop2
;
9211 tree ssa_name
= NULL_TREE
;
9214 type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
9215 mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
9216 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
9218 treeop0
= treeop1
= treeop2
= NULL_TREE
;
9219 if (!VL_EXP_CLASS_P (exp
))
9220 switch (TREE_CODE_LENGTH (code
))
9223 case 3: treeop2
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
9224 case 2: treeop1
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
9225 case 1: treeop0
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
9235 ignore
= (target
== const0_rtx
9236 || ((CONVERT_EXPR_CODE_P (code
)
9237 || code
== COND_EXPR
|| code
== VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
)
9238 && TREE_CODE (type
) == VOID_TYPE
));
9240 /* An operation in what may be a bit-field type needs the
9241 result to be reduced to the precision of the bit-field type,
9242 which is narrower than that of the type's mode. */
9243 reduce_bit_field
= (!ignore
9244 && INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
)
9245 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
) > TYPE_PRECISION (type
));
9247 /* If we are going to ignore this result, we need only do something
9248 if there is a side-effect somewhere in the expression. If there
9249 is, short-circuit the most common cases here. Note that we must
9250 not call expand_expr with anything but const0_rtx in case this
9251 is an initial expansion of a size that contains a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR. */
9255 if (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp
))
9258 /* Ensure we reference a volatile object even if value is ignored, but
9259 don't do this if all we are doing is taking its address. */
9260 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
)
9261 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != FUNCTION_DECL
9262 && mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
9263 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
)
9265 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
9271 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == tcc_unary
9272 || code
== BIT_FIELD_REF
9273 || code
== COMPONENT_REF
9274 || code
== INDIRECT_REF
)
9275 return expand_expr (treeop0
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
9278 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == tcc_binary
9279 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == tcc_comparison
9280 || code
== ARRAY_REF
|| code
== ARRAY_RANGE_REF
)
9282 expand_expr (treeop0
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
9283 expand_expr (treeop1
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
9290 if (reduce_bit_field
&& modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
9293 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
9294 subtarget
= get_subtarget (target
);
9295 original_target
= target
;
9301 tree function
= decl_function_context (exp
);
9303 temp
= label_rtx (exp
);
9304 temp
= gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, temp
);
9306 if (function
!= current_function_decl
9308 LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (temp
) = 1;
9310 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE
, temp
);
9315 /* ??? ivopts calls expander, without any preparation from
9316 out-of-ssa. So fake instructions as if this was an access to the
9317 base variable. This unnecessarily allocates a pseudo, see how we can
9318 reuse it, if partition base vars have it set already. */
9319 if (!currently_expanding_to_rtl
)
9321 tree var
= SSA_NAME_VAR (exp
);
9322 if (var
&& DECL_RTL_SET_P (var
))
9323 return DECL_RTL (var
);
9324 return gen_raw_REG (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
9325 LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
+ 1);
9328 g
= get_gimple_for_ssa_name (exp
);
9329 /* For EXPAND_INITIALIZER try harder to get something simpler. */
9331 && modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9332 && !SSA_NAME_IS_DEFAULT_DEF (exp
)
9333 && (optimize
|| DECL_IGNORED_P (SSA_NAME_VAR (exp
)))
9334 && stmt_is_replaceable_p (SSA_NAME_DEF_STMT (exp
)))
9335 g
= SSA_NAME_DEF_STMT (exp
);
9339 location_t saved_loc
= curr_insn_location ();
9341 set_curr_insn_location (gimple_location (g
));
9342 r
= expand_expr_real (gimple_assign_rhs_to_tree (g
), target
,
9343 tmode
, modifier
, NULL
);
9344 set_curr_insn_location (saved_loc
);
9345 if (REG_P (r
) && !REG_EXPR (r
))
9346 set_reg_attrs_for_decl_rtl (SSA_NAME_VAR (exp
), r
);
9351 decl_rtl
= get_rtx_for_ssa_name (ssa_name
);
9352 exp
= SSA_NAME_VAR (ssa_name
);
9353 goto expand_decl_rtl
;
9357 /* If a static var's type was incomplete when the decl was written,
9358 but the type is complete now, lay out the decl now. */
9359 if (DECL_SIZE (exp
) == 0
9360 && COMPLETE_OR_UNBOUND_ARRAY_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
9361 && (TREE_STATIC (exp
) || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp
)))
9362 layout_decl (exp
, 0);
9364 /* ... fall through ... */
9368 decl_rtl
= DECL_RTL (exp
);
9370 gcc_assert (decl_rtl
);
9371 decl_rtl
= copy_rtx (decl_rtl
);
9372 /* Record writes to register variables. */
9373 if (modifier
== EXPAND_WRITE
9375 && HARD_REGISTER_P (decl_rtl
))
9376 add_to_hard_reg_set (&crtl
->asm_clobbers
,
9377 GET_MODE (decl_rtl
), REGNO (decl_rtl
));
9379 /* Ensure variable marked as used even if it doesn't go through
9380 a parser. If it hasn't be used yet, write out an external
9382 TREE_USED (exp
) = 1;
9384 /* Show we haven't gotten RTL for this yet. */
9387 /* Variables inherited from containing functions should have
9388 been lowered by this point. */
9389 context
= decl_function_context (exp
);
9390 gcc_assert (SCOPE_FILE_SCOPE_P (context
)
9391 || context
== current_function_decl
9392 || TREE_STATIC (exp
)
9393 || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp
)
9394 /* ??? C++ creates functions that are not TREE_STATIC. */
9395 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == FUNCTION_DECL
);
9397 /* This is the case of an array whose size is to be determined
9398 from its initializer, while the initializer is still being parsed.
9399 ??? We aren't parsing while expanding anymore. */
9401 if (MEM_P (decl_rtl
) && REG_P (XEXP (decl_rtl
, 0)))
9402 temp
= validize_mem (decl_rtl
);
9404 /* If DECL_RTL is memory, we are in the normal case and the
9405 address is not valid, get the address into a register. */
9407 else if (MEM_P (decl_rtl
) && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
9410 *alt_rtl
= decl_rtl
;
9411 decl_rtl
= use_anchored_address (decl_rtl
);
9412 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9413 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
9414 && !memory_address_addr_space_p (DECL_MODE (exp
),
9416 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (decl_rtl
)))
9417 temp
= replace_equiv_address (decl_rtl
,
9418 copy_rtx (XEXP (decl_rtl
, 0)));
9421 /* If we got something, return it. But first, set the alignment
9422 if the address is a register. */
9425 if (MEM_P (temp
) && REG_P (XEXP (temp
, 0)))
9426 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (temp
, 0), DECL_ALIGN (exp
));
9431 /* If the mode of DECL_RTL does not match that of the decl,
9432 there are two cases: we are dealing with a BLKmode value
9433 that is returned in a register, or we are dealing with
9434 a promoted value. In the latter case, return a SUBREG
9435 of the wanted mode, but mark it so that we know that it
9436 was already extended. */
9437 if (REG_P (decl_rtl
)
9438 && DECL_MODE (exp
) != BLKmode
9439 && GET_MODE (decl_rtl
) != DECL_MODE (exp
))
9441 enum machine_mode pmode
;
9443 /* Get the signedness to be used for this variable. Ensure we get
9444 the same mode we got when the variable was declared. */
9445 if (code
== SSA_NAME
9446 && (g
= SSA_NAME_DEF_STMT (ssa_name
))
9447 && gimple_code (g
) == GIMPLE_CALL
)
9449 gcc_assert (!gimple_call_internal_p (g
));
9450 pmode
= promote_function_mode (type
, mode
, &unsignedp
,
9451 gimple_call_fntype (g
),
9455 pmode
= promote_decl_mode (exp
, &unsignedp
);
9456 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (decl_rtl
) == pmode
);
9458 temp
= gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode
, decl_rtl
);
9459 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp
) = 1;
9460 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_SET (temp
, unsignedp
);
9467 temp
= immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp
),
9468 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp
), mode
);
9474 tree tmp
= NULL_TREE
;
9475 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_INT
9476 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT
9477 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_FRACT
9478 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_UFRACT
9479 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_ACCUM
9480 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_VECTOR_UACCUM
)
9481 return const_vector_from_tree (exp
);
9482 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
)
9484 tree type_for_mode
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode (mode
, 1);
9486 tmp
= fold_unary_loc (loc
, VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
, type_for_mode
, exp
);
9490 vec
<constructor_elt
, va_gc
> *v
;
9492 vec_alloc (v
, VECTOR_CST_NELTS (exp
));
9493 for (i
= 0; i
< VECTOR_CST_NELTS (exp
); ++i
)
9494 CONSTRUCTOR_APPEND_ELT (v
, NULL_TREE
, VECTOR_CST_ELT (exp
, i
));
9495 tmp
= build_constructor (type
, v
);
9497 return expand_expr (tmp
, ignore
? const0_rtx
: target
,
9502 return expand_expr (DECL_INITIAL (exp
), target
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
9505 /* If optimized, generate immediate CONST_DOUBLE
9506 which will be turned into memory by reload if necessary.
9508 We used to force a register so that loop.c could see it. But
9509 this does not allow gen_* patterns to perform optimizations with
9510 the constants. It also produces two insns in cases like "x = 1.0;".
9511 On most machines, floating-point constants are not permitted in
9512 many insns, so we'd end up copying it to a register in any case.
9514 Now, we do the copying in expand_binop, if appropriate. */
9515 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (exp
),
9516 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
9519 return CONST_FIXED_FROM_FIXED_VALUE (TREE_FIXED_CST (exp
),
9520 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
9523 /* Handle evaluating a complex constant in a CONCAT target. */
9524 if (original_target
&& GET_CODE (original_target
) == CONCAT
)
9526 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
9529 rtarg
= XEXP (original_target
, 0);
9530 itarg
= XEXP (original_target
, 1);
9532 /* Move the real and imaginary parts separately. */
9533 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_REALPART (exp
), rtarg
, mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9534 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_IMAGPART (exp
), itarg
, mode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9537 emit_move_insn (rtarg
, op0
);
9539 emit_move_insn (itarg
, op1
);
9541 return original_target
;
9544 /* ... fall through ... */
9547 temp
= expand_expr_constant (exp
, 1, modifier
);
9549 /* temp contains a constant address.
9550 On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
9551 make some insns to get that address into a register. */
9552 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9553 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9554 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
9555 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (mode
, XEXP (temp
, 0),
9556 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (temp
)))
9557 return replace_equiv_address (temp
,
9558 copy_rtx (XEXP (temp
, 0)));
9564 rtx ret
= expand_expr_real_1 (val
, target
, tmode
, modifier
, alt_rtl
);
9566 if (!SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp
))
9568 /* We can indeed still hit this case, typically via builtin
9569 expanders calling save_expr immediately before expanding
9570 something. Assume this means that we only have to deal
9571 with non-BLKmode values. */
9572 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (ret
) != BLKmode
);
9574 val
= build_decl (curr_insn_location (),
9575 VAR_DECL
, NULL
, TREE_TYPE (exp
));
9576 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (val
) = 1;
9577 DECL_IGNORED_P (val
) = 1;
9579 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0) = treeop0
;
9580 SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp
) = 1;
9582 if (!CONSTANT_P (ret
))
9583 ret
= copy_to_reg (ret
);
9584 SET_DECL_RTL (val
, ret
);
9592 /* If we don't need the result, just ensure we evaluate any
9596 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
9599 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), idx
, value
)
9600 expand_expr (value
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
9605 return expand_constructor (exp
, target
, modifier
, false);
9607 case TARGET_MEM_REF
:
9610 = TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))));
9611 enum insn_code icode
;
9614 op0
= addr_for_mem_ref (exp
, as
, true);
9615 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (mode
, op0
, as
);
9616 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, op0
);
9617 set_mem_attributes (temp
, exp
, 0);
9618 set_mem_addr_space (temp
, as
);
9619 align
= get_object_alignment (exp
);
9620 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_WRITE
9621 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
9623 && align
< GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
9624 /* If the target does not have special handling for unaligned
9625 loads of mode then it can use regular moves for them. */
9626 && ((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
9627 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
9629 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
9631 /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a
9632 new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't fail,
9633 nor can the generator. */
9634 create_output_operand (&ops
[0], NULL_RTX
, mode
);
9635 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[1], temp
);
9636 expand_insn (icode
, 2, ops
);
9637 temp
= ops
[0].value
;
9645 = TYPE_ADDR_SPACE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))));
9646 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
9647 tree base
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
9649 enum insn_code icode
;
9651 /* Handle expansion of non-aliased memory with non-BLKmode. That
9652 might end up in a register. */
9653 if (mem_ref_refers_to_non_mem_p (exp
))
9655 HOST_WIDE_INT offset
= mem_ref_offset (exp
).low
;
9656 base
= TREE_OPERAND (base
, 0);
9658 && tree_fits_uhwi_p (TYPE_SIZE (type
))
9659 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (DECL_MODE (base
))
9660 == tree_to_uhwi (TYPE_SIZE (type
))))
9661 return expand_expr (build1 (VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
, type
, base
),
9662 target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9663 if (TYPE_MODE (type
) == BLKmode
)
9665 temp
= assign_stack_temp (DECL_MODE (base
),
9666 GET_MODE_SIZE (DECL_MODE (base
)));
9667 store_expr (base
, temp
, 0, false);
9668 temp
= adjust_address (temp
, BLKmode
, offset
);
9669 set_mem_size (temp
, int_size_in_bytes (type
));
9672 exp
= build3 (BIT_FIELD_REF
, type
, base
, TYPE_SIZE (type
),
9673 bitsize_int (offset
* BITS_PER_UNIT
));
9674 return expand_expr (exp
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9676 address_mode
= targetm
.addr_space
.address_mode (as
);
9677 base
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
9678 if ((def_stmt
= get_def_for_expr (base
, BIT_AND_EXPR
)))
9680 tree mask
= gimple_assign_rhs2 (def_stmt
);
9681 base
= build2 (BIT_AND_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (base
),
9682 gimple_assign_rhs1 (def_stmt
), mask
);
9683 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0) = base
;
9685 align
= get_object_alignment (exp
);
9686 op0
= expand_expr (base
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_SUM
);
9687 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (mode
, op0
, as
);
9688 if (!integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
9691 = immed_double_int_const (mem_ref_offset (exp
), address_mode
);
9692 op0
= simplify_gen_binary (PLUS
, address_mode
, op0
, off
);
9693 op0
= memory_address_addr_space (mode
, op0
, as
);
9695 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, op0
);
9696 set_mem_attributes (temp
, exp
, 0);
9697 set_mem_addr_space (temp
, as
);
9698 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
))
9699 MEM_VOLATILE_P (temp
) = 1;
9700 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_WRITE
9701 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
9703 && align
< GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
9705 if ((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
9706 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
9708 struct expand_operand ops
[2];
9710 /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a
9711 new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't fail,
9712 nor can the generator. */
9713 create_output_operand (&ops
[0], NULL_RTX
, mode
);
9714 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[1], temp
);
9715 expand_insn (icode
, 2, ops
);
9716 temp
= ops
[0].value
;
9718 else if (SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, align
))
9719 temp
= extract_bit_field (temp
, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
),
9720 0, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
9721 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9722 ? NULL_RTX
: target
),
9731 tree array
= treeop0
;
9732 tree index
= treeop1
;
9735 /* Fold an expression like: "foo"[2].
9736 This is not done in fold so it won't happen inside &.
9737 Don't fold if this is for wide characters since it's too
9738 difficult to do correctly and this is a very rare case. */
9740 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9741 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9742 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
)
9744 tree t
= fold_read_from_constant_string (exp
);
9747 return expand_expr (t
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9750 /* If this is a constant index into a constant array,
9751 just get the value from the array. Handle both the cases when
9752 we have an explicit constructor and when our operand is a variable
9753 that was declared const. */
9755 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9756 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9757 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
9758 && TREE_CODE (array
) == CONSTRUCTOR
9759 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array
)
9760 && TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
)
9762 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix
;
9765 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (array
), ix
,
9767 if (tree_int_cst_equal (field
, index
))
9769 if (!TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value
))
9770 return expand_expr (fold (value
), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9775 else if (optimize
>= 1
9776 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
9777 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
9778 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
9779 && TREE_READONLY (array
) && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array
)
9780 && TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
9781 && (TREE_CODE (array
) == VAR_DECL
9782 || TREE_CODE (array
) == CONST_DECL
)
9783 && (init
= ctor_for_folding (array
)) != error_mark_node
)
9785 if (TREE_CODE (init
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
9787 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix
;
9790 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (init
), ix
,
9792 if (tree_int_cst_equal (field
, index
))
9794 if (TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value
))
9797 if (TREE_CODE (value
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
9799 /* If VALUE is a CONSTRUCTOR, this
9800 optimization is only useful if
9801 this doesn't store the CONSTRUCTOR
9802 into memory. If it does, it is more
9803 efficient to just load the data from
9804 the array directly. */
9805 rtx ret
= expand_constructor (value
, target
,
9807 if (ret
== NULL_RTX
)
9812 expand_expr (fold (value
), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9815 else if (TREE_CODE (init
) == STRING_CST
)
9817 tree low_bound
= array_ref_low_bound (exp
);
9818 tree index1
= fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
, treeop1
);
9820 /* Optimize the special case of a zero lower bound.
9822 We convert the lower bound to sizetype to avoid problems
9823 with constant folding. E.g. suppose the lower bound is
9824 1 and its mode is QI. Without the conversion
9825 (ARRAY + (INDEX - (unsigned char)1))
9827 (ARRAY + (-(unsigned char)1) + INDEX)
9829 (ARRAY + 255 + INDEX). Oops! */
9830 if (!integer_zerop (low_bound
))
9831 index1
= size_diffop_loc (loc
, index1
,
9832 fold_convert_loc (loc
, sizetype
,
9835 if (compare_tree_int (index1
, TREE_STRING_LENGTH (init
)) < 0)
9837 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (init
));
9838 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
9840 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
9841 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) == 1)
9842 return gen_int_mode (TREE_STRING_POINTER (init
)
9843 [TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index1
)],
9849 goto normal_inner_ref
;
9852 /* If the operand is a CONSTRUCTOR, we can just extract the
9853 appropriate field if it is present. */
9854 if (TREE_CODE (treeop0
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
9856 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx
;
9859 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (treeop0
),
9861 if (field
== treeop1
9862 /* We can normally use the value of the field in the
9863 CONSTRUCTOR. However, if this is a bitfield in
9864 an integral mode that we can fit in a HOST_WIDE_INT,
9865 we must mask only the number of bits in the bitfield,
9866 since this is done implicitly by the constructor. If
9867 the bitfield does not meet either of those conditions,
9868 we can't do this optimization. */
9869 && (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
)
9870 || ((GET_MODE_CLASS (DECL_MODE (field
)) == MODE_INT
)
9871 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (DECL_MODE (field
))
9872 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
))))
9874 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
)
9875 && modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
)
9877 op0
= expand_expr (value
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
9878 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
))
9880 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (field
));
9881 enum machine_mode imode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (field
));
9883 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (field
)))
9885 op1
= gen_int_mode (((HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << bitsize
) - 1,
9887 op0
= expand_and (imode
, op0
, op1
, target
);
9891 int count
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (imode
) - bitsize
;
9893 op0
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, imode
, op0
, count
,
9895 op0
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, imode
, op0
, count
,
9903 goto normal_inner_ref
;
9906 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF
:
9909 enum machine_mode mode1
, mode2
;
9910 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
9912 int volatilep
= 0, must_force_mem
;
9913 tree tem
= get_inner_reference (exp
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
,
9914 &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
);
9915 rtx orig_op0
, memloc
;
9916 bool mem_attrs_from_type
= false;
9918 /* If we got back the original object, something is wrong. Perhaps
9919 we are evaluating an expression too early. In any event, don't
9920 infinitely recurse. */
9921 gcc_assert (tem
!= exp
);
9923 /* If TEM's type is a union of variable size, pass TARGET to the inner
9924 computation, since it will need a temporary and TARGET is known
9925 to have to do. This occurs in unchecked conversion in Ada. */
9928 (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) == UNION_TYPE
9929 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (tem
))
9930 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)))
9932 && modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
9933 ? target
: NULL_RTX
),
9935 modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
? EXPAND_NORMAL
: modifier
);
9937 /* If the bitfield is volatile, we want to access it in the
9938 field's mode, not the computed mode.
9939 If a MEM has VOIDmode (external with incomplete type),
9940 use BLKmode for it instead. */
9943 if (volatilep
&& flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0)
9944 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode1
, 0);
9945 else if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
)
9946 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, BLKmode
, 0);
9950 = CONSTANT_P (op0
) ? TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) : GET_MODE (op0
);
9952 /* If we have either an offset, a BLKmode result, or a reference
9953 outside the underlying object, we must force it to memory.
9954 Such a case can occur in Ada if we have unchecked conversion
9955 of an expression from a scalar type to an aggregate type or
9956 for an ARRAY_RANGE_REF whose type is BLKmode, or if we were
9957 passed a partially uninitialized object or a view-conversion
9958 to a larger size. */
9959 must_force_mem
= (offset
9961 || bitpos
+ bitsize
> GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode2
));
9963 /* Handle CONCAT first. */
9964 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == CONCAT
&& !must_force_mem
)
9967 && bitsize
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)))
9970 && bitsize
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
9973 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
9974 mode2
= GET_MODE (op0
);
9976 else if (bitpos
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
9977 && bitsize
== GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 1)))
9981 op0
= XEXP (op0
, 1);
9983 mode2
= GET_MODE (op0
);
9986 /* Otherwise force into memory. */
9990 /* If this is a constant, put it in a register if it is a legitimate
9991 constant and we don't need a memory reference. */
9992 if (CONSTANT_P (op0
)
9994 && targetm
.legitimate_constant_p (mode2
, op0
)
9996 op0
= force_reg (mode2
, op0
);
9998 /* Otherwise, if this is a constant, try to force it to the constant
9999 pool. Note that back-ends, e.g. MIPS, may refuse to do so if it
10000 is a legitimate constant. */
10001 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0
) && (memloc
= force_const_mem (mode2
, op0
)))
10002 op0
= validize_mem (memloc
);
10004 /* Otherwise, if this is a constant or the object is not in memory
10005 and need be, put it there. */
10006 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0
) || (!MEM_P (op0
) && must_force_mem
))
10008 tree nt
= build_qualified_type (TREE_TYPE (tem
),
10009 (TYPE_QUALS (TREE_TYPE (tem
))
10010 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST
));
10011 memloc
= assign_temp (nt
, 1, 1);
10012 emit_move_insn (memloc
, op0
);
10014 mem_attrs_from_type
= true;
10019 enum machine_mode address_mode
;
10020 rtx offset_rtx
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
,
10023 gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0
));
10025 address_mode
= get_address_mode (op0
);
10026 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != address_mode
)
10027 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (address_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
10029 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == BLKmode
10030 /* A constant address in OP0 can have VOIDmode, we must
10031 not try to call force_reg in that case. */
10032 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) != VOIDmode
10034 && (bitpos
% bitsize
) == 0
10035 && (bitsize
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)) == 0
10036 && MEM_ALIGN (op0
) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
))
10038 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10042 op0
= offset_address (op0
, offset_rtx
,
10043 highest_pow2_factor (offset
));
10046 /* If OFFSET is making OP0 more aligned than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT,
10047 record its alignment as BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
10048 if (MEM_P (op0
) && bitpos
== 0 && offset
!= 0
10049 && is_aligning_offset (offset
, tem
))
10050 set_mem_align (op0
, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
);
10052 /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield. */
10053 if (MEM_P (op0
) && volatilep
&& ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
))
10055 if (op0
== orig_op0
)
10056 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
10058 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) = 1;
10061 /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object
10062 as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from
10063 an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object. Handle this case
10064 by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field
10065 (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then
10066 storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode. */
10067 if (mode1
== VOIDmode
10068 || REG_P (op0
) || GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
10069 || (mode1
!= BLKmode
&& ! direct_load
[(int) mode1
]
10070 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
10071 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
10072 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
10073 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
10074 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
)
10075 /* If the field is volatile, we always want an aligned
10076 access. Do this in following two situations:
10077 1. the access is not already naturally
10078 aligned, otherwise "normal" (non-bitfield) volatile fields
10079 become non-addressable.
10080 2. the bitsize is narrower than the access size. Need
10081 to extract bitfields from the access. */
10082 || (volatilep
&& flag_strict_volatile_bitfields
> 0
10083 && (bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) != 0
10084 || (mode1
!= BLKmode
10085 && bitsize
< GET_MODE_SIZE (mode1
) * BITS_PER_UNIT
)))
10086 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to fetch as a memref,
10087 fetch it as a bit field. */
10088 || (mode1
!= BLKmode
10089 && (((TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
10090 || (bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) != 0)
10092 && (MEM_ALIGN (op0
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)
10093 || (bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
) != 0))))
10094 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY
10095 && ((modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
10096 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
10098 : SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode1
, MEM_ALIGN (op0
))))
10099 || (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
!= 0)))
10100 /* If the type and the field are a constant size and the
10101 size of the type isn't the same size as the bitfield,
10102 we must use bitfield operations. */
10104 && TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
10105 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) == INTEGER_CST
10106 && 0 != compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
10109 enum machine_mode ext_mode
= mode
;
10111 if (ext_mode
== BLKmode
10112 && ! (target
!= 0 && MEM_P (op0
)
10114 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0))
10115 ext_mode
= mode_for_size (bitsize
, MODE_INT
, 1);
10117 if (ext_mode
== BLKmode
)
10120 target
= assign_temp (type
, 1, 1);
10125 /* In this case, BITPOS must start at a byte boundary and
10126 TARGET, if specified, must be a MEM. */
10127 gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0
)
10128 && (!target
|| MEM_P (target
))
10129 && !(bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
));
10131 emit_block_move (target
,
10132 adjust_address (op0
, VOIDmode
,
10133 bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
),
10134 GEN_INT ((bitsize
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1)
10136 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
10137 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
10142 op0
= validize_mem (op0
);
10144 if (MEM_P (op0
) && REG_P (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
10145 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0
));
10147 op0
= extract_bit_field (op0
, bitsize
, bitpos
, unsignedp
,
10148 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
10149 ? NULL_RTX
: target
),
10150 ext_mode
, ext_mode
);
10152 /* If the result is a record type and BITSIZE is narrower than
10153 the mode of OP0, an integral mode, and this is a big endian
10154 machine, we must put the field into the high-order bits. */
10155 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == RECORD_TYPE
&& BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
10156 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
10157 && bitsize
< (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)))
10158 op0
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
10159 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
))
10160 - bitsize
, op0
, 1);
10162 /* If the result type is BLKmode, store the data into a temporary
10163 of the appropriate type, but with the mode corresponding to the
10164 mode for the data we have (op0's mode). It's tempting to make
10165 this a constant type, since we know it's only being stored once,
10166 but that can cause problems if we are taking the address of this
10167 COMPONENT_REF because the MEM of any reference via that address
10168 will have flags corresponding to the type, which will not
10169 necessarily be constant. */
10170 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
10174 new_rtx
= assign_stack_temp_for_type (ext_mode
,
10175 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (ext_mode
),
10177 emit_move_insn (new_rtx
, op0
);
10178 op0
= copy_rtx (new_rtx
);
10179 PUT_MODE (op0
, BLKmode
);
10185 /* If the result is BLKmode, use that to access the object
10187 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
10190 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
10191 if (modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
10192 || modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
10193 op0
= adjust_address_nv (op0
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10195 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode1
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10197 if (op0
== orig_op0
)
10198 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
10200 /* If op0 is a temporary because of forcing to memory, pass only the
10201 type to set_mem_attributes so that the original expression is never
10202 marked as ADDRESSABLE through MEM_EXPR of the temporary. */
10203 if (mem_attrs_from_type
)
10204 set_mem_attributes (op0
, type
, 0);
10206 set_mem_attributes (op0
, exp
, 0);
10208 if (REG_P (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
10209 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0
));
10211 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) |= volatilep
;
10212 if (mode
== mode1
|| mode1
== BLKmode
|| mode1
== tmode
10213 || modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
10214 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
10218 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
10220 convert_move (target
, op0
, unsignedp
);
10225 return expand_expr (OBJ_TYPE_REF_EXPR (exp
), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
10228 /* All valid uses of __builtin_va_arg_pack () are removed during
10230 if (CALL_EXPR_VA_ARG_PACK (exp
))
10231 error ("%Kinvalid use of %<__builtin_va_arg_pack ()%>", exp
);
10233 tree fndecl
= get_callee_fndecl (exp
), attr
;
10236 && (attr
= lookup_attribute ("error",
10237 DECL_ATTRIBUTES (fndecl
))) != NULL
)
10238 error ("%Kcall to %qs declared with attribute error: %s",
10239 exp
, identifier_to_locale (lang_hooks
.decl_printable_name (fndecl
, 1)),
10240 TREE_STRING_POINTER (TREE_VALUE (TREE_VALUE (attr
))));
10242 && (attr
= lookup_attribute ("warning",
10243 DECL_ATTRIBUTES (fndecl
))) != NULL
)
10244 warning_at (tree_nonartificial_location (exp
),
10245 0, "%Kcall to %qs declared with attribute warning: %s",
10246 exp
, identifier_to_locale (lang_hooks
.decl_printable_name (fndecl
, 1)),
10247 TREE_STRING_POINTER (TREE_VALUE (TREE_VALUE (attr
))));
10249 /* Check for a built-in function. */
10250 if (fndecl
&& DECL_BUILT_IN (fndecl
))
10252 gcc_assert (DECL_BUILT_IN_CLASS (fndecl
) != BUILT_IN_FRONTEND
);
10253 return expand_builtin (exp
, target
, subtarget
, tmode
, ignore
);
10256 return expand_call (exp
, target
, ignore
);
10258 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR
:
10261 /* If we are converting to BLKmode, try to avoid an intermediate
10262 temporary by fetching an inner memory reference. */
10263 if (mode
== BLKmode
10264 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type
)) == INTEGER_CST
10265 && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)) != BLKmode
10266 && handled_component_p (treeop0
))
10268 enum machine_mode mode1
;
10269 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
, bitpos
;
10274 = get_inner_reference (treeop0
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
,
10275 &offset
, &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
);
10278 /* ??? We should work harder and deal with non-zero offsets. */
10280 && (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) == 0
10282 && compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (type
), bitsize
) == 0)
10284 /* See the normal_inner_ref case for the rationale. */
10286 = expand_expr (tem
,
10287 (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) == UNION_TYPE
10288 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)))
10290 && modifier
!= EXPAND_STACK_PARM
10291 ? target
: NULL_RTX
),
10293 modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
? EXPAND_NORMAL
: modifier
);
10295 if (MEM_P (orig_op0
))
10299 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
10300 if (modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
10301 || modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
10302 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
10303 op0
= adjust_address_nv (op0
, mode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10305 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
10307 if (op0
== orig_op0
)
10308 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
10310 set_mem_attributes (op0
, treeop0
, 0);
10311 if (REG_P (XEXP (op0
, 0)))
10312 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0
));
10314 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) |= volatilep
;
10320 op0
= expand_expr (treeop0
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, modifier
);
10322 /* If the input and output modes are both the same, we are done. */
10323 if (mode
== GET_MODE (op0
))
10325 /* If neither mode is BLKmode, and both modes are the same size
10326 then we can use gen_lowpart. */
10327 else if (mode
!= BLKmode
&& GET_MODE (op0
) != BLKmode
10328 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode
)
10329 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (op0
)))
10330 && !COMPLEX_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0
)))
10332 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
)
10333 op0
= force_reg (GET_MODE (op0
), op0
);
10334 temp
= gen_lowpart_common (mode
, op0
);
10339 if (!REG_P (op0
) && !MEM_P (op0
))
10340 op0
= force_reg (GET_MODE (op0
), op0
);
10341 op0
= gen_lowpart (mode
, op0
);
10344 /* If both types are integral, convert from one mode to the other. */
10345 else if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type
) && INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)))
10346 op0
= convert_modes (mode
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
10347 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (treeop0
)));
10348 /* As a last resort, spill op0 to memory, and reload it in a
10350 else if (!MEM_P (op0
))
10352 /* If the operand is not a MEM, force it into memory. Since we
10353 are going to be changing the mode of the MEM, don't call
10354 force_const_mem for constants because we don't allow pool
10355 constants to change mode. */
10356 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
10358 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
));
10360 if (target
== 0 || GET_MODE (target
) != TYPE_MODE (inner_type
))
10362 = assign_stack_temp_for_type
10363 (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
),
10364 GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
)), inner_type
);
10366 emit_move_insn (target
, op0
);
10370 /* At this point, OP0 is in the correct mode. If the output type is
10371 such that the operand is known to be aligned, indicate that it is.
10372 Otherwise, we need only be concerned about alignment for non-BLKmode
10376 enum insn_code icode
;
10378 if (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (type
))
10380 /* ??? Copying the MEM without substantially changing it might
10381 run afoul of the code handling volatile memory references in
10382 store_expr, which assumes that TARGET is returned unmodified
10383 if it has been used. */
10384 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
10385 set_mem_align (op0
, MAX (MEM_ALIGN (op0
), TYPE_ALIGN (type
)));
10387 else if (mode
!= BLKmode
10388 && MEM_ALIGN (op0
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
10389 /* If the target does have special handling for unaligned
10390 loads of mode then use them. */
10391 && ((icode
= optab_handler (movmisalign_optab
, mode
))
10392 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
10396 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode
, 0);
10397 /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a
10398 new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't
10400 reg
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
10402 /* Nor can the insn generator. */
10403 insn
= GEN_FCN (icode
) (reg
, op0
);
10407 else if (STRICT_ALIGNMENT
10409 && MEM_ALIGN (op0
) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
10411 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (treeop0
);
10412 HOST_WIDE_INT temp_size
10413 = MAX (int_size_in_bytes (inner_type
),
10414 (HOST_WIDE_INT
) GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
10416 = assign_stack_temp_for_type (mode
, temp_size
, type
);
10417 rtx new_with_op0_mode
10418 = adjust_address (new_rtx
, GET_MODE (op0
), 0);
10420 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
));
10422 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == BLKmode
)
10423 emit_block_move (new_with_op0_mode
, op0
,
10424 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)),
10425 (modifier
== EXPAND_STACK_PARM
10426 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
: BLOCK_OP_NORMAL
));
10428 emit_move_insn (new_with_op0_mode
, op0
);
10433 op0
= adjust_address (op0
, mode
, 0);
10440 tree lhs
= treeop0
;
10441 tree rhs
= treeop1
;
10442 gcc_assert (ignore
);
10444 /* Check for |= or &= of a bitfield of size one into another bitfield
10445 of size 1. In this case, (unless we need the result of the
10446 assignment) we can do this more efficiently with a
10447 test followed by an assignment, if necessary.
10449 ??? At this point, we can't get a BIT_FIELD_REF here. But if
10450 things change so we do, this code should be enhanced to
10452 if (TREE_CODE (lhs
) == COMPONENT_REF
10453 && (TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
10454 || TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_AND_EXPR
)
10455 && TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 0) == lhs
10456 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1)) == COMPONENT_REF
10457 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs
, 1)))
10458 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1), 1))))
10460 rtx label
= gen_label_rtx ();
10461 int value
= TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
;
10462 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1),
10464 value
? 0 : label
, -1);
10465 expand_assignment (lhs
, build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (rhs
), value
),
10467 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
10468 emit_label (label
);
10472 expand_assignment (lhs
, rhs
, false);
10477 return expand_expr_addr_expr (exp
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
10479 case REALPART_EXPR
:
10480 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
10481 return read_complex_part (op0
, false);
10483 case IMAGPART_EXPR
:
10484 op0
= expand_normal (treeop0
);
10485 return read_complex_part (op0
, true);
10492 /* Expanded in cfgexpand.c. */
10493 gcc_unreachable ();
10495 case TRY_CATCH_EXPR
:
10497 case EH_FILTER_EXPR
:
10498 case TRY_FINALLY_EXPR
:
10499 /* Lowered by tree-eh.c. */
10500 gcc_unreachable ();
10502 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR
:
10503 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR
:
10505 case CASE_LABEL_EXPR
:
10510 case COMPOUND_EXPR
:
10511 case PREINCREMENT_EXPR
:
10512 case PREDECREMENT_EXPR
:
10513 case POSTINCREMENT_EXPR
:
10514 case POSTDECREMENT_EXPR
:
10517 case COMPOUND_LITERAL_EXPR
:
10518 /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */
10519 gcc_unreachable ();
10522 /* Function descriptors are not valid except for as
10523 initialization constants, and should not be expanded. */
10524 gcc_unreachable ();
10526 case WITH_SIZE_EXPR
:
10527 /* WITH_SIZE_EXPR expands to its first argument. The caller should
10528 have pulled out the size to use in whatever context it needed. */
10529 return expand_expr_real (treeop0
, original_target
, tmode
,
10530 modifier
, alt_rtl
);
10533 return expand_expr_real_2 (&ops
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
10537 /* Subroutine of above: reduce EXP to the precision of TYPE (in the
10538 signedness of TYPE), possibly returning the result in TARGET. */
10540 reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx exp
, rtx target
, tree type
)
10542 HOST_WIDE_INT prec
= TYPE_PRECISION (type
);
10543 if (target
&& GET_MODE (target
) != GET_MODE (exp
))
10545 /* For constant values, reduce using build_int_cst_type. */
10546 if (CONST_INT_P (exp
))
10548 HOST_WIDE_INT value
= INTVAL (exp
);
10549 tree t
= build_int_cst_type (type
, value
);
10550 return expand_expr (t
, target
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
10552 else if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
))
10554 rtx mask
= immed_double_int_const (double_int::mask (prec
),
10556 return expand_and (GET_MODE (exp
), exp
, mask
, target
);
10560 int count
= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (exp
)) - prec
;
10561 exp
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (exp
),
10562 exp
, count
, target
, 0);
10563 return expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (exp
),
10564 exp
, count
, target
, 0);
10568 /* Subroutine of above: returns 1 if OFFSET corresponds to an offset that
10569 when applied to the address of EXP produces an address known to be
10570 aligned more than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
10573 is_aligning_offset (const_tree offset
, const_tree exp
)
10575 /* Strip off any conversions. */
10576 while (CONVERT_EXPR_P (offset
))
10577 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10579 /* We must now have a BIT_AND_EXPR with a constant that is one less than
10580 power of 2 and which is larger than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
10581 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) != BIT_AND_EXPR
10582 || !tree_fits_uhwi_p (TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 1))
10583 || compare_tree_int (TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 1),
10584 BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
) <= 0
10585 || !exact_log2 (tree_to_uhwi (TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 1)) + 1) < 0)
10588 /* Look at the first operand of BIT_AND_EXPR and strip any conversion.
10589 It must be NEGATE_EXPR. Then strip any more conversions. */
10590 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10591 while (CONVERT_EXPR_P (offset
))
10592 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10594 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) != NEGATE_EXPR
)
10597 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10598 while (CONVERT_EXPR_P (offset
))
10599 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0);
10601 /* This must now be the address of EXP. */
10602 return TREE_CODE (offset
) == ADDR_EXPR
&& TREE_OPERAND (offset
, 0) == exp
;
10605 /* Return the tree node if an ARG corresponds to a string constant or zero
10606 if it doesn't. If we return nonzero, set *PTR_OFFSET to the offset
10607 in bytes within the string that ARG is accessing. The type of the
10608 offset will be `sizetype'. */
10611 string_constant (tree arg
, tree
*ptr_offset
)
10613 tree array
, offset
, lower_bound
;
10616 if (TREE_CODE (arg
) == ADDR_EXPR
)
10618 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == STRING_CST
)
10620 *ptr_offset
= size_zero_node
;
10621 return TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
10623 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == VAR_DECL
)
10625 array
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
10626 offset
= size_zero_node
;
10628 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == ARRAY_REF
)
10630 array
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0), 0);
10631 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0), 1);
10632 if (TREE_CODE (array
) != STRING_CST
10633 && TREE_CODE (array
) != VAR_DECL
)
10636 /* Check if the array has a nonzero lower bound. */
10637 lower_bound
= array_ref_low_bound (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0));
10638 if (!integer_zerop (lower_bound
))
10640 /* If the offset and base aren't both constants, return 0. */
10641 if (TREE_CODE (lower_bound
) != INTEGER_CST
)
10643 if (TREE_CODE (offset
) != INTEGER_CST
)
10645 /* Adjust offset by the lower bound. */
10646 offset
= size_diffop (fold_convert (sizetype
, offset
),
10647 fold_convert (sizetype
, lower_bound
));
10650 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == MEM_REF
)
10652 array
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0), 0);
10653 offset
= TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0), 1);
10654 if (TREE_CODE (array
) != ADDR_EXPR
)
10656 array
= TREE_OPERAND (array
, 0);
10657 if (TREE_CODE (array
) != STRING_CST
10658 && TREE_CODE (array
) != VAR_DECL
)
10664 else if (TREE_CODE (arg
) == PLUS_EXPR
|| TREE_CODE (arg
) == POINTER_PLUS_EXPR
)
10666 tree arg0
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
10667 tree arg1
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 1);
10672 if (TREE_CODE (arg0
) == ADDR_EXPR
10673 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0)) == STRING_CST
10674 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0)) == VAR_DECL
))
10676 array
= TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0);
10679 else if (TREE_CODE (arg1
) == ADDR_EXPR
10680 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0)) == STRING_CST
10681 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0)) == VAR_DECL
))
10683 array
= TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0);
10692 if (TREE_CODE (array
) == STRING_CST
)
10694 *ptr_offset
= fold_convert (sizetype
, offset
);
10697 else if (TREE_CODE (array
) == VAR_DECL
10698 || TREE_CODE (array
) == CONST_DECL
)
10701 tree init
= ctor_for_folding (array
);
10703 /* Variables initialized to string literals can be handled too. */
10704 if (init
== error_mark_node
10706 || TREE_CODE (init
) != STRING_CST
)
10709 /* Avoid const char foo[4] = "abcde"; */
10710 if (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
) == NULL_TREE
10711 || TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
)) != INTEGER_CST
10712 || (length
= TREE_STRING_LENGTH (init
)) <= 0
10713 || compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
), length
) < 0)
10716 /* If variable is bigger than the string literal, OFFSET must be constant
10717 and inside of the bounds of the string literal. */
10718 offset
= fold_convert (sizetype
, offset
);
10719 if (compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array
), length
) > 0
10720 && (! tree_fits_uhwi_p (offset
)
10721 || compare_tree_int (offset
, length
) >= 0))
10724 *ptr_offset
= offset
;
10731 /* Generate code to calculate OPS, and exploded expression
10732 using a store-flag instruction and return an rtx for the result.
10733 OPS reflects a comparison.
10735 If TARGET is nonzero, store the result there if convenient.
10737 Return zero if there is no suitable set-flag instruction
10738 available on this machine.
10740 Once expand_expr has been called on the arguments of the comparison,
10741 we are committed to doing the store flag, since it is not safe to
10742 re-evaluate the expression. We emit the store-flag insn by calling
10743 emit_store_flag, but only expand the arguments if we have a reason
10744 to believe that emit_store_flag will be successful. If we think that
10745 it will, but it isn't, we have to simulate the store-flag with a
10746 set/jump/set sequence. */
10749 do_store_flag (sepops ops
, rtx target
, enum machine_mode mode
)
10751 enum rtx_code code
;
10752 tree arg0
, arg1
, type
;
10754 enum machine_mode operand_mode
;
10757 rtx subtarget
= target
;
10758 location_t loc
= ops
->location
;
10763 /* Don't crash if the comparison was erroneous. */
10764 if (arg0
== error_mark_node
|| arg1
== error_mark_node
)
10767 type
= TREE_TYPE (arg0
);
10768 operand_mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
10769 unsignedp
= TYPE_UNSIGNED (type
);
10771 /* We won't bother with BLKmode store-flag operations because it would mean
10772 passing a lot of information to emit_store_flag. */
10773 if (operand_mode
== BLKmode
)
10776 /* We won't bother with store-flag operations involving function pointers
10777 when function pointers must be canonicalized before comparisons. */
10778 #ifdef HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10779 if (HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10780 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (arg0
)) == POINTER_TYPE
10781 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg0
)))
10783 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (arg1
)) == POINTER_TYPE
10784 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg1
)))
10785 == FUNCTION_TYPE
))))
10792 /* For vector typed comparisons emit code to generate the desired
10793 all-ones or all-zeros mask. Conveniently use the VEC_COND_EXPR
10794 expander for this. */
10795 if (TREE_CODE (ops
->type
) == VECTOR_TYPE
)
10797 tree ifexp
= build2 (ops
->code
, ops
->type
, arg0
, arg1
);
10798 tree if_true
= constant_boolean_node (true, ops
->type
);
10799 tree if_false
= constant_boolean_node (false, ops
->type
);
10800 return expand_vec_cond_expr (ops
->type
, ifexp
, if_true
, if_false
, target
);
10803 /* Get the rtx comparison code to use. We know that EXP is a comparison
10804 operation of some type. Some comparisons against 1 and -1 can be
10805 converted to comparisons with zero. Do so here so that the tests
10806 below will be aware that we have a comparison with zero. These
10807 tests will not catch constants in the first operand, but constants
10808 are rarely passed as the first operand. */
10819 if (integer_onep (arg1
))
10820 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
10822 code
= unsignedp
? LTU
: LT
;
10825 if (! unsignedp
&& integer_all_onesp (arg1
))
10826 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= LT
;
10828 code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
10831 if (! unsignedp
&& integer_all_onesp (arg1
))
10832 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= GE
;
10834 code
= unsignedp
? GTU
: GT
;
10837 if (integer_onep (arg1
))
10838 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= unsignedp
? GTU
: GT
;
10840 code
= unsignedp
? GEU
: GE
;
10843 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
10869 gcc_unreachable ();
10872 /* Put a constant second. */
10873 if (TREE_CODE (arg0
) == REAL_CST
|| TREE_CODE (arg0
) == INTEGER_CST
10874 || TREE_CODE (arg0
) == FIXED_CST
)
10876 tem
= arg0
; arg0
= arg1
; arg1
= tem
;
10877 code
= swap_condition (code
);
10880 /* If this is an equality or inequality test of a single bit, we can
10881 do this by shifting the bit being tested to the low-order bit and
10882 masking the result with the constant 1. If the condition was EQ,
10883 we xor it with 1. This does not require an scc insn and is faster
10884 than an scc insn even if we have it.
10886 The code to make this transformation was moved into fold_single_bit_test,
10887 so we just call into the folder and expand its result. */
10889 if ((code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
)
10890 && integer_zerop (arg1
)
10891 && (TYPE_PRECISION (ops
->type
) != 1 || TYPE_UNSIGNED (ops
->type
)))
10893 gimple srcstmt
= get_def_for_expr (arg0
, BIT_AND_EXPR
);
10895 && integer_pow2p (gimple_assign_rhs2 (srcstmt
)))
10897 enum tree_code tcode
= code
== NE
? NE_EXPR
: EQ_EXPR
;
10898 tree type
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode (mode
, unsignedp
);
10899 tree temp
= fold_build2_loc (loc
, BIT_AND_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (arg1
),
10900 gimple_assign_rhs1 (srcstmt
),
10901 gimple_assign_rhs2 (srcstmt
));
10902 temp
= fold_single_bit_test (loc
, tcode
, temp
, arg1
, type
);
10904 return expand_expr (temp
, target
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
10908 if (! get_subtarget (target
)
10909 || GET_MODE (subtarget
) != operand_mode
)
10912 expand_operands (arg0
, arg1
, subtarget
, &op0
, &op1
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
10915 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
10917 /* Try a cstore if possible. */
10918 return emit_store_flag_force (target
, code
, op0
, op1
,
10919 operand_mode
, unsignedp
,
10920 (TYPE_PRECISION (ops
->type
) == 1
10921 && !TYPE_UNSIGNED (ops
->type
)) ? -1 : 1);
10925 /* Stubs in case we haven't got a casesi insn. */
10926 #ifndef HAVE_casesi
10927 # define HAVE_casesi 0
10928 # define gen_casesi(a, b, c, d, e) (0)
10929 # define CODE_FOR_casesi CODE_FOR_nothing
10932 /* Attempt to generate a casesi instruction. Returns 1 if successful,
10933 0 otherwise (i.e. if there is no casesi instruction).
10935 DEFAULT_PROBABILITY is the probability of jumping to the default
10938 try_casesi (tree index_type
, tree index_expr
, tree minval
, tree range
,
10939 rtx table_label
, rtx default_label
, rtx fallback_label
,
10940 int default_probability
)
10942 struct expand_operand ops
[5];
10943 enum machine_mode index_mode
= SImode
;
10944 rtx op1
, op2
, index
;
10949 /* Convert the index to SImode. */
10950 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (index_type
)) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode
))
10952 enum machine_mode omode
= TYPE_MODE (index_type
);
10953 rtx rangertx
= expand_normal (range
);
10955 /* We must handle the endpoints in the original mode. */
10956 index_expr
= build2 (MINUS_EXPR
, index_type
,
10957 index_expr
, minval
);
10958 minval
= integer_zero_node
;
10959 index
= expand_normal (index_expr
);
10961 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (rangertx
, index
, LTU
, NULL_RTX
,
10962 omode
, 1, default_label
,
10963 default_probability
);
10964 /* Now we can safely truncate. */
10965 index
= convert_to_mode (index_mode
, index
, 0);
10969 if (TYPE_MODE (index_type
) != index_mode
)
10971 index_type
= lang_hooks
.types
.type_for_mode (index_mode
, 0);
10972 index_expr
= fold_convert (index_type
, index_expr
);
10975 index
= expand_normal (index_expr
);
10978 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
10980 op1
= expand_normal (minval
);
10981 op2
= expand_normal (range
);
10983 create_input_operand (&ops
[0], index
, index_mode
);
10984 create_convert_operand_from_type (&ops
[1], op1
, TREE_TYPE (minval
));
10985 create_convert_operand_from_type (&ops
[2], op2
, TREE_TYPE (range
));
10986 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[3], table_label
);
10987 create_fixed_operand (&ops
[4], (default_label
10989 : fallback_label
));
10990 expand_jump_insn (CODE_FOR_casesi
, 5, ops
);
10994 /* Attempt to generate a tablejump instruction; same concept. */
10995 #ifndef HAVE_tablejump
10996 #define HAVE_tablejump 0
10997 #define gen_tablejump(x, y) (0)
11000 /* Subroutine of the next function.
11002 INDEX is the value being switched on, with the lowest value
11003 in the table already subtracted.
11004 MODE is its expected mode (needed if INDEX is constant).
11005 RANGE is the length of the jump table.
11006 TABLE_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx for the table itself.
11008 DEFAULT_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx to jump to if the
11009 index value is out of range.
11010 DEFAULT_PROBABILITY is the probability of jumping to
11011 the default label. */
11014 do_tablejump (rtx index
, enum machine_mode mode
, rtx range
, rtx table_label
,
11015 rtx default_label
, int default_probability
)
11019 if (INTVAL (range
) > cfun
->cfg
->max_jumptable_ents
)
11020 cfun
->cfg
->max_jumptable_ents
= INTVAL (range
);
11022 /* Do an unsigned comparison (in the proper mode) between the index
11023 expression and the value which represents the length of the range.
11024 Since we just finished subtracting the lower bound of the range
11025 from the index expression, this comparison allows us to simultaneously
11026 check that the original index expression value is both greater than
11027 or equal to the minimum value of the range and less than or equal to
11028 the maximum value of the range. */
11031 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index
, range
, GTU
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1,
11032 default_label
, default_probability
);
11035 /* If index is in range, it must fit in Pmode.
11036 Convert to Pmode so we can index with it. */
11038 index
= convert_to_mode (Pmode
, index
, 1);
11040 /* Don't let a MEM slip through, because then INDEX that comes
11041 out of PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS won't be a valid address,
11042 and break_out_memory_refs will go to work on it and mess it up. */
11043 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
11044 if (flag_pic
&& !REG_P (index
))
11045 index
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, index
);
11048 /* ??? The only correct use of CASE_VECTOR_MODE is the one inside the
11049 GET_MODE_SIZE, because this indicates how large insns are. The other
11050 uses should all be Pmode, because they are addresses. This code
11051 could fail if addresses and insns are not the same size. */
11052 index
= gen_rtx_PLUS
11054 gen_rtx_MULT (Pmode
, index
,
11055 gen_int_mode (GET_MODE_SIZE (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
), Pmode
)),
11056 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, table_label
));
11057 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
11059 index
= PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS (index
);
11062 index
= memory_address (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
, index
);
11063 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
);
11064 vector
= gen_const_mem (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
, index
);
11065 convert_move (temp
, vector
, 0);
11067 emit_jump_insn (gen_tablejump (temp
, table_label
));
11069 /* If we are generating PIC code or if the table is PC-relative, the
11070 table and JUMP_INSN must be adjacent, so don't output a BARRIER. */
11071 if (! CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
&& ! flag_pic
)
11076 try_tablejump (tree index_type
, tree index_expr
, tree minval
, tree range
,
11077 rtx table_label
, rtx default_label
, int default_probability
)
11081 if (! HAVE_tablejump
)
11084 index_expr
= fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR
, index_type
,
11085 fold_convert (index_type
, index_expr
),
11086 fold_convert (index_type
, minval
));
11087 index
= expand_normal (index_expr
);
11088 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
11090 do_tablejump (index
, TYPE_MODE (index_type
),
11091 convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (index_type
),
11092 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range
)),
11093 expand_normal (range
),
11094 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range
))),
11095 table_label
, default_label
, default_probability
);
11099 /* Return a CONST_VECTOR rtx for a VECTOR_CST tree. */
11101 const_vector_from_tree (tree exp
)
11107 enum machine_mode inner
, mode
;
11109 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
11111 if (initializer_zerop (exp
))
11112 return CONST0_RTX (mode
);
11114 units
= GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode
);
11115 inner
= GET_MODE_INNER (mode
);
11117 v
= rtvec_alloc (units
);
11119 for (i
= 0; i
< VECTOR_CST_NELTS (exp
); ++i
)
11121 elt
= VECTOR_CST_ELT (exp
, i
);
11123 if (TREE_CODE (elt
) == REAL_CST
)
11124 RTVEC_ELT (v
, i
) = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (elt
),
11126 else if (TREE_CODE (elt
) == FIXED_CST
)
11127 RTVEC_ELT (v
, i
) = CONST_FIXED_FROM_FIXED_VALUE (TREE_FIXED_CST (elt
),
11130 RTVEC_ELT (v
, i
) = immed_double_int_const (tree_to_double_int (elt
),
11134 return gen_rtx_CONST_VECTOR (mode
, v
);
11137 /* Build a decl for a personality function given a language prefix. */
11140 build_personality_function (const char *lang
)
11142 const char *unwind_and_version
;
11146 switch (targetm_common
.except_unwind_info (&global_options
))
11151 unwind_and_version
= "_sj0";
11155 unwind_and_version
= "_v0";
11158 unwind_and_version
= "_seh0";
11161 gcc_unreachable ();
11164 name
= ACONCAT (("__", lang
, "_personality", unwind_and_version
, NULL
));
11166 type
= build_function_type_list (integer_type_node
, integer_type_node
,
11167 long_long_unsigned_type_node
,
11168 ptr_type_node
, ptr_type_node
, NULL_TREE
);
11169 decl
= build_decl (UNKNOWN_LOCATION
, FUNCTION_DECL
,
11170 get_identifier (name
), type
);
11171 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (decl
) = 1;
11172 DECL_EXTERNAL (decl
) = 1;
11173 TREE_PUBLIC (decl
) = 1;
11175 /* Zap the nonsensical SYMBOL_REF_DECL for this. What we're left with
11176 are the flags assigned by targetm.encode_section_info. */
11177 SET_SYMBOL_REF_DECL (XEXP (DECL_RTL (decl
), 0), NULL
);
11182 /* Extracts the personality function of DECL and returns the corresponding
11186 get_personality_function (tree decl
)
11188 tree personality
= DECL_FUNCTION_PERSONALITY (decl
);
11189 enum eh_personality_kind pk
;
11191 pk
= function_needs_eh_personality (DECL_STRUCT_FUNCTION (decl
));
11192 if (pk
== eh_personality_none
)
11196 && pk
== eh_personality_any
)
11197 personality
= lang_hooks
.eh_personality ();
11199 if (pk
== eh_personality_lang
)
11200 gcc_assert (personality
!= NULL_TREE
);
11202 return XEXP (DECL_RTL (personality
), 0);
11205 #include "gt-expr.h"